Owner’s Manual
2017 MKC
February 2016
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKC
Litho in U.S.A.
HJ7J 19A321 AA
2017 MKC Owner’s Manual
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications,
design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language
in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2016
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 01/2016 20160119162841
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate........................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services.........................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Export Unique Options...................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment..........................16
Child Safety
General Information........................................17
Installing Child Restraints..............................19
Booster Seats..................................................25
Child Restraint Positioning...........................28
Child Safety Locks..........................................29
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation.....................................31
Fastening the Seatbelts................................32
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................35
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime............................................................35
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................36
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................38
Seatbelt Extension.........................................39
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..............................40
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation.....................................41
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................42
Front Passenger Sensing System..............44
Side Airbags.....................................................47
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................48
Safety Canopy™...............................................48
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........49
Airbag Disposal................................................51
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................52
Remote Control...............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................57
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................58
Creating a MyKey...........................................59
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................60
Checking MyKey System Status.................60
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................61
MyKey Troubleshooting.................................61
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.................................63
Power Liftgate.................................................68
Keyless Entry.....................................................71
1
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................75
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................76
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................78
Audio Control...................................................79
Voice Control...................................................80
Cruise Control.................................................80
Information Display Control.........................80
Heated Steering Wheel..................................81
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................82
Autowipers.......................................................83
Windshield Washers.......................................84
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............84
Lighting
General Information.......................................86
Lighting Control..............................................86
Autolamps.........................................................87
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................88
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................89
Daytime Running Lamps...............................89
Automatic High Beam Control....................90
Direction Indicators.........................................91
Welcome Lighting............................................91
Interior Lamps..................................................92
Ambient Lighting............................................92
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..............................................93
Global Opening and Closing.......................94
Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Interior Mirror...................................................97
Sun Visors.........................................................98
Moonroof..........................................................98
Instrument Cluster
Gauges..............................................................101
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................103
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............107
Information Displays
General Information......................................108
Information Messages...................................114
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control..........................133
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................135
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................136
Cabin Air Filter................................................137
Remote Start...................................................137
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position....................138
Head Restraints.............................................138
Power Seats.....................................................141
Memory Function..........................................143
Rear Seats.......................................................144
Heated Seats..................................................145
Climate Controlled Seats............................146
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................147
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................148
2
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................153
Storage Compartments
Center Console.............................................155
Overhead Console.......................................155
Ticket Holders................................................155
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information......................................156
Keyless Starting.............................................156
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................157
Engine Block Heater....................................160
Unique Driving Characteristics
Auto-Start-Stop...............................................161
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................164
Fuel Quality.....................................................165
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................166
Running Out of Fuel.....................................166
Refueling..........................................................167
Fuel Consumption.........................................169
Emission Control System.............................170
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...............................173
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................179
Brakes
General Information......................................184
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................184
Electric Parking Brake..................................185
Auto Hold........................................................187
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................190
Using Traction Control.................................190
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................192
Using Stability Control.................................193
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................194
Rear Parking Aid............................................195
Front Parking Aid..........................................195
Active Park Assist - Vehicles With: Active
Park Assist..................................................196
Rear View Camera.......................................204
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................208
Using Cruise Control...................................208
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................209
Driving Aids
Driver Alert......................................................217
Lane Keeping System..................................218
Blind Spot Information System.................223
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................225
Steering..........................................................229
Collision Warning System..........................230
Drive Control.................................................233
3
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................235
Luggage Covers...........................................235
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................235
Load Limit.......................................................236
Towing
Towing a Trailer..............................................241
Trailer Sway Control....................................242
Recommended Towing Weights..............242
Essential Towing Checks............................245
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........247
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................249
Economical Driving......................................249
Driving Through Water...............................250
Floor Mats......................................................250
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................252
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................253
Fuel Shutoff...................................................253
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................254
Post-Crash Alert System............................256
Transporting the Vehicle............................257
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need................259
In California (U.S. Only)...............................260
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).........................261
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)...........................................262
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................263
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................264
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......265
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................265
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart............................267
Changing a Fuse..........................................283
Maintenance
General Information.....................................286
Opening and Closing the Hood...............286
Under Hood Overview................................288
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................290
Engine Oil Check.........................................290
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................291
Engine Coolant Check.................................291
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check......295
Brake Fluid Check.......................................295
Washer Fluid Check....................................296
Fuel Filter.......................................................296
Changing the 12V Battery..........................296
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................298
Changing the Wiper Blades......................298
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................299
Removing a Headlamp...............................300
Changing a Bulb...........................................300
Bulb Specification Chart..............................301
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................303
Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................305
4
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
Cleaning Products.......................................305
Cleaning the Exterior..................................306
Waxing.............................................................307
Cleaning the Engine....................................307
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.........................................................308
Cleaning the Interior....................................308
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................310
Cleaning Leather Seats................................311
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...................311
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................312
Vehicle Storage.............................................312
Wheels and Tires
General Information......................................315
Tire Care..........................................................317
Using Snow Chains.......................................331
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............332
Changing a Road Wheel.............................336
Technical Specifications.............................342
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................344
Engine Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™..................................................345
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™...........346
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™............347
Vehicle Identification Number..................348
Vehicle Certification Label.........................348
Transmission Code Designation..............349
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................350
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™..................................................356
Audio System
General Information.....................................362
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................363
Media Hub......................................................365
SYNC™ 3
General Information.....................................366
Home Screen................................................384
Using Voice Recognition............................385
Entertainment................................................396
Climate............................................................409
Phone...............................................................413
Navigation......................................................420
Apps..................................................................431
Settings...........................................................434
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting...........................451
Accessories
Accessories...................................................468
Lincoln Protect
Lincoln Protect..............................................470
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........472
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............476
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................480
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............484
5
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
7
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
8
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle
diagnostic information received through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford
of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for
vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only
(if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
9
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used for any purpose. See SYNC™
3 (page 366).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
10
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature. See
SYNC™ 3 (page 366).
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
See SYNC™ 3 (page 366).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
11
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
WARNINGS
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
12
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate that these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A
great way to know for sure you are getting
this level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the warning
symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Never place front seat mounted
rear-facing child or infant seats in front
of an active passenger airbag.
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING
Use of wireless plug-in devices in the
OBD Data Link Connector (DLC) may
allow unauthorized third parties to gain
access to vehicle systems and data which
could impair the function of various vehicle
systems, including safety-related systems.
The DLC should only be used by a repair
facility that operates in accordance with
Ford’s service and repair instructions.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction
with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle
diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming
services. Installing an aftermarket device that
uses the DLC during normal driving for
purposes such as remote insurance company
monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to
other devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
13
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
interference with or even damage to vehicle
systems. We do not recommend or endorse
the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless
approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will
not cover damage caused by an aftermarket
plug-in device.
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is
not a passenger car. As with other vehicles
of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a
snowplowing package.
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
14
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
15
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
16
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age and
weight thresholds from the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. We recommend
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed in
your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
WARNINGS
Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371
or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat
Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain
children in safety seats made especially for
their height, age, and weight may result in
an increased risk of serious injury or death
to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
17
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
18
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 44).
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
19
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
20
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
21
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to
22
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
attach the child seat, however the safety belt
can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation. The LATCH anchors
are located at the rear section of the rear
seat between the cushion and seatback.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety seats
with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child seat manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those in this
vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments on
belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to your vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety
belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if included with the child seat.
23
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the safety belt, the lower
anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you
can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also be
removed.
E142538
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are labeled
with the tether strap symbol and are
partially covered by the gap panel. Pull
the panel back to fully expose the
anchors.
24
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint system
is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends
its use, we also recommend its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
25
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
26
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
27
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
28
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight of
child and child seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 138).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
29
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
30
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
WARNINGS
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts
• shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt)
• height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions
31
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
• retractor and anchor pretensioner at the
front outboard seating positions
• belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position
• safety belt warning light and chime
• crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed
to activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at
the front seating positions are designed to
tighten the safety belts firmly against the
occupant's body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts.
In frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
E142589
32
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
When in use, the rear seatbelts should be
placed in the belt guides on the outboard
seatbacks.
Using a Sliding Clip (If Equipped)
E200788
Slide the clip away from the tongue so there
is no loose webbing when an occupant or
child seat is buckled up. You can also use
the sliding clip to raise the tongue and
prevent it from rattling or to ease access to
the tongue.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the seatbelt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
seatbelt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the seatbelt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow
this practice. See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seatbelts
should be checked for proper function.
The belt and retractor assembly must
be replaced if the seatbelt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other seatbelt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
33
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking
mode, and the front outboard passenger and
rear seatbelts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
17).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates
the seatbelt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
34
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
turn on the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
How to Extract Seatbelts in the Rear
Outboard Positions
Seatbelts in the rear outboard positions can
lock if the seatback is returned firmly to its
upright position. You can unlock the
seatbelts using the following procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The seatbelt should then unlock.
3. Return the seatback to its desired upright
position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position:
1. Grasp the seatbelt webbing at the top of
the seatback.
2. Pull the seatbelt webbing forward, firmly.
3. After pulling the seatbelt forward, allow
the seatbelt to feed back into the seatbelt
retractor as much as possible. If
necessary, press the seatback down to
allow the seatbelt webbing to retract
further.
4. The seatbelt should then unlock.
5. If the seatbelt does not unlock, repeat
steps 1-3.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the seatbelt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the
seatbelt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
35
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
you place in the front passenger seat, only
the front seat passengers receive warnings
as determined by the front passenger
sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
36
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
37
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
38
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However, if
the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 305).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNINGS
Persons who fit into the vehicle's
seatbelt should not use an extension.
Unnecessary use could result in serious
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNINGS
Only use extensions provided free of
charge by Lincoln Motor Company
dealers. The dealer will provide an extension
designed specifically for this vehicle, model
year and seating position. The use of an
extension intended for another vehicle,
model year or seating position may not offer
you the full protection of your vehicle’s
seatbelt restraint system.
Never use seatbelt extensions to install
child restraints.
Do not use a seatbelt extension with
an inflatable seatbelt.
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the belt across the torso, over the
lap or to make the seatbelt buckle easier to
reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Lincoln Motor Company dealers. Only Lincoln
seatbelt extensions made by the same
company which made the original equipment
seatbelts, should be used with Lincoln
seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your
extension is compatible with your Lincoln
vehicle restraint system.
39
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
40
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation as this may result in serious
injury.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
41
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
42
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest
and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
43
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger sensing
system which could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and safety belt
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
44
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
45
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seatback.
• Objects stowed in the seatback map
pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter
due to the conditions described in the list
above.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 49).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat, or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If there are lodged objects, or cargo is
interfering with the seat, take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged underneath
the front passenger seat or cargo
interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that
the airbag readiness light is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger
sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
46
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 259).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 49).
47
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain crash
and occupant conditions, the driver’s knee
airbag may deploy but the driver’s front
airbag may not activate. As with front and
side airbags, it is important to be properly
seated and restrained to reduce the risk of
death or serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbag is
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 49).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on
a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNINGS
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including the A,
B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
48
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label
or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 49).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of your vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
49
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module which
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags, and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of accident (frontal impact, side
impact or rollover) the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. A
warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster indicates the readiness of the safety
system. If this warning indicator light is not
functioning and there is another fault within
the system, the message cluster may display
an airbag failure warning. See Information
Displays (page 108). You will hear five tones
that repeat periodically until you repair the
problem, the warning indicator light or both.
Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will not illuminate
immediately after the ignition is turned
on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag
supplemental restraint system is designed
to activate when your vehicle sustains frontal
or sideways deceleration sufficient to cause
the restraints control module to deploy a
safety device or when a certain likelihood of
a rollover event is detected by the rollover
sensor.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
airbags did not activate for both front seat
occupants in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system. Rather,
it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (for
example, crash severity, belt usage) were
not appropriate to activate these safety
devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal, side and rollover crashes.
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side crashes. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation.
50
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes and
when a certain likelihood of rollover is
detected by the rollover sensor. The
Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
51
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of any exterior door
handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an
intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 53).
52
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E218688
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
E218689
Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
53
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery is
low. See Information Messages (page 114).
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E218689
1. Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E218690
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218691
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
54
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. A tone sounds and the
direction indicators will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The transmitter has an
extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate control,
you can configure it to operate when you
remote start your vehicle. See Climate
Control (page 133).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch the feature off in the
information display.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides status
feedback of remote start or stop commands.
55
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
StatusLED.
Remote start or
extension
successful.
Solid green.
Remote stop
successful; vehicle
off.
Solid red.
Remote start or stop
failed.
Blinking red.
Waiting for status
update.
Blinking green.
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
A tone sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration
extends by another 10 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 20
minutes. You can extend the engine running
time duration to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps turn
off.
56
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access key
to recall memory positions. See Memory
Function (page 143).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 75).
57
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys but one. Any keys that
you did not program are administrator keys
or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features listed
below. If your vehicle has this equipment,
then you cannot change the following
settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey
mutes the audio system until drivers, and
in some instances, passengers, fasten
their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle
includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic
audio system, then the radio may not
mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems or
parking aids turn on automatically when
you use the MyKey system. For example,
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure warning
or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey
drivers may be able to turn the lane
departure warning feature off, but this
feature turns back on automatically with
every new key cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in some
markets. For example, MyKey may
prevent manual navigation destination
input while the vehicle is in any gear
other than park (P) or when the vehicle
reaches a certain rate of speed.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if this feature is available in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward with
an admin key.
58
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing choices
to switch them on or off, or to select a more
specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and a
tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display when
MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the
limited volume. MyKey also disables the
automatic volume control. Note: If your
vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a
very basic audio system, then the radio
may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and active
for MyKey drivers. For example, traction
control, AdvanceTrac, E911 or emergency
assistance and the do not disturb
features stay on even if a MyKey driver
uses the feature's control to switch it off.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to begin programming your
MyKey. See Information Displays (page
108).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming your
MyKey. The programmed restrictions
apply when you restart your vehicle with
the programmed key or transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program the optional MyKey
settings.
59
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
Programming or Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your optional MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. See Information Displays (page
108).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming your
MyKey. The programmed restrictions
apply when you restart your vehicle with
the programmed key or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. If you switch
the engine off, you must use an admin key
to change or clear your optional MyKey
settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status at once. To clear
all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the
information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to begin clearing your MyKey
programming. See Information Displays
(page 108).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You cannot
remove the MyKey restrictions individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 108).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys
have been deleted.
60
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to determine how many admin keys you have
for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential causesCondition
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into
the backup position. See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 157).
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key.
There always has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot program the configurable settings.
61
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential causesCondition
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a
MyKey (page 59).
· An admin transmitter is present when you started your vehicle.For vehicles with keyless start: No MyKey restrictions are available
when starting the vehicle. · There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a
MyKey (page 59).
· The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin
privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 59).
· Purchase a new key or tranmitter from your authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
· Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see your
authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 75).
I lost a key.
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
62
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock or the
remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock is on the driver and
front passenger door panels.
E138628
UnlockA
LockB
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim lights
when you lock the door. It remains on for up
to five minutes after you switch the ignition
off.
Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock and interior luggage
compartment release switch will no longer
operate after 20 seconds. You must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to
restore function to these switches. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See General Information (page 108).
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
The luggage compartment release button
only works when your vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door. Press the button again
within three seconds to unlock all
doors. The direction indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for four
seconds to disable or enable two-stage
unlocking. Disabling two-stage unlocking
allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one
press of the button. The direction indicators
will flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver door will
unlock all doors when you disable two-stage
unlocking.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The direction indicators will
flash.
63
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors lock again, a tone sounds and the
direction indicators flash if all the doors and
the luggage compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door or the luggage compartment is
open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with
an anti-theft alarm or remote start, a tone
sounds and the direction indicators will not
flash. You can switch this feature on or off in
the information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Audible and Visual Locking Confirmation
If audible and visual locking confirmation is
configurable, you can turn it on or off using
the information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Power Liftgate (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
WARNINGS
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open, close or stop the
movement of a power liftgate. See
Power Liftgate (page 68).
Mechanical Key
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to lock
and unlock your vehicle. See Remote
Control (page 53).
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle once to lock all doors.
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle once to unlock the driver door
only.
Locking the Doors Individually
If the power locks fail to operate, lock the
doors individually using the key in the
position shown.
64
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
E180643
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Opening a Rear Door from Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull will unlatch the
door.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 ft
(1 m) of the door or luggage compartment
you intend to lock or unlock.
Locking the Doors
E146044
The locking sensors are on the front and rear
door handles.
Press and hold the lock sensor area for about
a second to lock your vehicle. To avoid
unlocking the door inadvertently, make sure
you only touch the lock sensor and not other
areas of the door handle.
After locking the doors with the lock sensor,
there is a brief delay before you can unlock
your vehicle. This delay lets you pull the
handle to make sure it locked.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
to avoid issues with operation.
65
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Unlocking the Doors
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. The unlock sensor is on the
back of the handle. Make sure not to touch
the lock sensor area on the front of the
handle.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button
inside the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent access
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle with the door
open and the ignition off, your vehicle will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close the
door. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your
vehicle after you have closed all the doors
by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the handle
with another intelligent access key in
your hand.
When you open one of the front doors with
the ignition on, and lock your vehicle using
the power door lock, all doors will lock then
unlock.
Autolock Feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when all of the following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when both of
the following occur:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Your vehicle then attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Enabling or Disabling
To enable or disable the autolock feature,
contact an authorized dealer.
Autounlock Feature
The autounlock feature unlocks all the doors
when all of the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 4 mph
(7 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
66
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 108).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will light when you unlock the doors with the
remote control.
The system turns off the lights if:
• You start your vehicle.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• They are on for 25 seconds.
The lights will not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lamp
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps
will light when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and either of the following occurs:
• After 25 seconds elapse.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps or dome
lamps on and switch the ignition off, this
feature turns them off after some time.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave your vehicle with the ignition on,
it will turn off 15 minutes after you close all
of the doors.
Welcome Lighting
This feature lights select exterior lighting as
you approach your vehicle. You must have
an intelligent access key with you. The
feature turns off when you open a door,
liftgate, or unlock your vehicle. Welcome
lighting remains on for 25 seconds or until
you start your vehicle.
The feature is active when:
• The feature is configured on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
• The ignition is off.
• All doors and the liftgate are closed.
• You lock your vehicle.
The feature is not active when:
• Your vehicle detects the intelligent
access key is inside.
• The intelligent access key is in close
range of the vehicle for more than two
minutes.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
67
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
• You do not start your vehicle for more
than five days.
• The vehicle battery charge is low.
Note: When this feature is disabled, you
must switch the ignition on to reset it.
Note: This feature may not correctly operate
if the intelligent access key is stored within
8–15 ft (2.4–4.6 m) of your vehicle while not
in use.
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNINGS
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do
not allow children to operate or play
near an open or moving power liftgate. You
should supervise the operation of the power
liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. One short chime
indicates a problem with the open or close
request, caused by:
• The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
strut failure. A repetitive chime sounds and
the liftgate closes under control. Remove any
excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
68
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle, for
example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
Press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E180684
2. Press the button to unlatch the liftgate.
69
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control button.
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This could
damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.
*
*
This method only works for vehicles with the
hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when it
reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving,
you can also manually move it to the desired
height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control button
on the liftgate until you hear a chime,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the power
liftgate, you can manually move it to a
different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after you
have programmed a lower height than fully
open, you can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
70
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three tones sound and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and three tones sound. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.
Hands-Free Feature
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
E171686
2
1
1. Move your foot under and away from the
rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your foot
sideways or the sensors may not detect
the motion. For vehicles with both the
hands-free liftgate and trailer tow, move
your foot under the bumper between the
trailer hitch and the exhaust.
2. The liftgate will power open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a strut failure.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when washing your
vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and then
it lights up so you can see and touch the
appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
71
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Recall memory seat and mirror positions.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also create up to five of your
own five-digit personal entry codes.
The Keyless Entry Keypad will only work if
the driver door is closed and transmission is
in park (P).
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1•2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1•2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3•4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5•6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7•8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9•0 to save personal code 5.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 will recall driver 3 memory
positions.
72
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1•2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1•2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes will erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any of
the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity passes.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set five-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is disabled. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 63).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3•4 control within five
seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7•8 and 9•0 at the same time
with the driver door closed. You do not need
to enter the keypad code first.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: You will need to have two
programmed intelligent access keys for this
procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
E170454
1. Open the center console lid.
2. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the key.
73
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
5. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
The factory-set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
74
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Lincoln aftermarket remote start
systems. Use of these systems may result
in engine starting problems and a loss of
security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting problems,
especially if they are too close to the key
when starting your vehicle. Prevent these
objects from touching the coded key when
starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off,
move all objects on the key chain away from
the coded key and restart your vehicle if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
coded key, it is not operating correctly. A
message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, you will need to have your vehicle
towed to an authorized dealer to program
new coded keys.
Store a spare intelligent access key away
from your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access keys readily accessible. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
75
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Security
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Carry out all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you carry out any steps out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1. Open the center console lid.
E170454
2. Insert the first programmed key in the
backup slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If
programming remains unsuccessful, contact
an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
76
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Security
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
77
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 138).
1
2
2
E95178
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 138).
E161834
78
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 143).
Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation. The
column responds to the adjustment control.
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control again
after encountering the new stopping
position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the column position.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to the full up position to
allow extra room to exit your vehicle. The
column will return to the previous setting
when you switch the ignition on. You can
enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 108).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
E145979
Volume up.A
Volume down.B
Seek up or next.C
Seek down or previous.D
Mute.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
79
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E145980
Voice recognition.A
End call.B
Answer call.C
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E145976
Type 2
E145977
See Cruise Control (page 208).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E145981
See Information Displays (page 108).
80
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
See your SYNC information.
81
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers and vehicle power off before using
an automatic car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Checking the Wiper
Blades (page 298). If that does not resolve
the issue, install new wiper blades. See
Changing the Wiper Blades (page 298).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: When wiping on dry glass, the wipers
may switch to the next lower operating mode
(low-speed or intermittent). The previous
operation mode may resume after the
windshield becomes wet again.
E197525
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Normal wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Note: Move to position O marked on the
wiper lever to switch off.
Intermittent Wipe
E197526
Short-wipe interval.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Long-wipe interval.C
Push the wiper lever up to switch the wipers
on, and then use the rotary control to adjust
the intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
82
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers and ignition off before using an
automatic car wash.
Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in the
area around the interior mirror. The rain
sensor monitors the amount of moisture on
the windshield and automatically turns the
wipers on. It will adjust the wiper speed by
the amount of moisture that the sensor
detects on the windshield.
E215460
Highest sensitivity.A
On.B
Lowest sensitivity.C
Switch the autowipers on by moving the
wiper lever up to the first position.
Switch the autowipers off by moving the
wiper lever down.
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the autowipers. When you select low
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the
sensor detects a large amount of water on
the windshield. When you select high
sensitivity, the wipers will operate when the
sensor detects a small amount of water on
the windshield.
The autowipers feature is active and ready
when the wiper lever is in the first position
and selected in the information display. You
can change the autowipers feature to
intermittent wipers through the information
display. See General Information (page 108).
Note: Check your wiper function in the
information display. See General
Information (page 108). The autowipers
feature functions only when you select the
menu choice in the information display and
you move the wiper lever up to the first
position. The autowipers feature then
remains on in the information display menu
until you change it to intermittent wipe.
83
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps turn on automatically when the
rain sensor activates the windshield wipers
continuously. See General Information
(page 108).
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit
the windshield.
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe by
moving the wiper lever up.
• Switch the autowipers off and switch
intermittent mode on through the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
• Switch the autowipers off by moving the
wiper lever down.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 298).
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E197528
To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you. When
you release the lever, the wipers will operate
for a short time.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch the rear window
wiper and ignition off before using an
automatic car wash.
E197647
Intermittent wipe.A
Low speed wipe.B
Off.C
Press the top of the button to switch
intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the
button again to switch low speed wipe on.
Press the bottom of the button to switch the
rear window wiper off.
84
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
When you shift into reverse (R) and the front
wipers are on, the rear wiper may
automatically turn on to intermittent wipe.
Rear Window Washer
E197529
Push the lever away from you to operate the
rear window washer. When you release the
lever, wiping continues for a short period of
time.
85
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
B
HeadlampsC
86
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
High Beams
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever
toward you to switch the high beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
E162680
Pull the lever toward you slightly and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the tail lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Always ensure that your
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
E142451
87
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps will automatically
turn on in low light situations or when wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 108).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the headlamps on.
Note: If the lighting control switch is in the
autolamps position and the headlamps are
off, the parking lamps will light as signature
lighting. If the headlamps are on, or the
lighting control switch is in the parking lamps
position, the parking lamps will not light as
signature lighting.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control switch is in the autolamps position.
They will turn off approximately 60 seconds
after you switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you have autolamps and autowipers
switched on, the low beam headlamps will
turn on automatically when the windshield
wipers operate continuously.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
A B
E165366
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to brighten.
B
88
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with any
door open or 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed. You can cancel this feature
by pulling the direction indicator toward you
again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Make sure the
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 108).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
108).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily override
autolamp control.
89
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system automatically turns on the high
beams if it is dark enough and no other traffic
is present. When it detects the headlights of
an approaching vehicle, the rear lamps of
the preceding vehicle or street lighting, the
system turns off the high beams before they
distract other drivers. The low beams remain
on.
Note: If it appears that automatic high beam
is not functioning properly, check the
windshield in front of the camera for a
blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Make
sure that authorized personnel repair any
windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
may go into low beam mode until you clear
the blockage. A message may also appear
in the information display noting the front
camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
do not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam control. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
may notice a decrease in the availability of
the automatic high beam control, especially
at start up. If you want to change the beam
state independently of the system, you may
switch the high beams on or off using the
lighting control switch. Automatic high beam
control resumes when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of your vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to switch
the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
switch on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 31 mph (50 km/h).
The high beams turn off if:
• The system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the rear lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
• Vehicle speed falls below approximately
26 mph (42 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on the system in the information
display and switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Information
Displays (page 108). See Autolamps (page
87).
90
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
E142451
Manually Overriding the System
E169254
Push or pull the lever to switch between high
and low beam.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E170427
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They will project an image onto
the ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat will turn on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors have
been automatically folded in upon locking
or using the switch on the door.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in manually to the door
window glass, then the welcome mats will
not turn on.
91
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS
The interior lamps turn on when:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
Front Interior Lamp
Note: Touch the door function switch to
switch the door function off when you open
any door. The indicator lamp will illuminate
amber when the door function is off. When
the door function is off and you open a door,
the courtesy and door lamps will stay off.
Touch the switch again to switch the door
function back on. The indicator lamp will
illuminate blue when the door function is on.
When the door function is on and you open
a door, the courtesy and door lamps will
switch on.
E176210
Map lamp switch.A.
All lamps on switch.B.
Door function switch.C.
Map lamp switch.D.
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
A
E170429
The rear interior lamps are located in the
headliner by the grab handles.
• You can switch individual rear lamps on
independently by pressing the switch (A).
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
The ambient lighting system is adjusted with
the touchscreen.
See SYNC supplement.
92
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
93
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can switch this feature on and off
in the information display or contact an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 108).
Note: To operate this feature, make sure the
accessory delay is not switched on.
Opening the Windows
You can open the windows only for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the windows, you should
verify they are free of obstructions and
make sure that children and pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
94
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control will light.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), turn off the vehicle,
open and close the driver's side door and
lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the vehicle
and open and close the driver's side door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Note: If you switch this feature off through
the information display, the welcome lighting
also switches off.
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
located on the door. The control lights and
the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.
Note: If you use the power-folding control to
fold the mirrors on demand and the auto fold
feature is switched on, you must use the
control again to unfold them.
95
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to reset
them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time the mirrors are manually
folded.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
136).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 143).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming mirror
turns on.
Lincoln Welcome Mat
Projection lights, on the bottom of the mirror
housings, project an image onto the ground
a short distance from the vehicle. See
Lighting (page 86).
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
The blind spot mirror has a wide-angle mirror
inside the exterior mirror that can increase
visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you intend to
change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to
verify traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.
96
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
223).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
97
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
The moonroof and sunscreen controls are
on the overhead console and have a
one-touch open and close feature. To stop
the motion during a one-touch operation,
touch the control a second time.
98
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E144499
OpenA
VentB
CloseC
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will stop
short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again to
fully open the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically and
reverse some distance if an obstacle is
detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of a
bounce-back event to override this function.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close it.
Power Sunscreen
E145985
CloseA
OpenB
Touch the associated control to operate the
sunscreen.
Press and release the rear of the control to
open the moonroof. If the sunscreen is
closed, it will automatically open before the
moonroof opens. The moonroof will stop
short of the fully opened position.
99
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and hold the
control again to fully open the moonroof.
Press and release the front of the control to
close the moonroof.
The sunscreen must be open before opening
the moonroof. If you touch the moonroof
open control while the sunscreen is in its
closed position, the sunscreen will open first
followed by the moonroof. If both the
sunscreen and moonroof are open and you
touch the moonroof close control, the
moonroof will close first followed by the
sunscreen.
100
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E170368
101
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
TachometerA
Information displayB
SpeedometerC
Fuel gaugeD
Engine coolant temperature gaugeE
Information Display
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 108).
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of
your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
The needle should move toward F when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E
after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle
needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
• It may take a short time for the needle to
reach F after leaving the gas station. This
is normal and depends upon the slope
of pavement at the gas station.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the tank
is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off before
the tank is full, try a different gas pump
nozzle.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at 1/16th.
102
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Variations:
Distance-to-emptyFuel gauge positionDriving type (fuel economy conditions)
35 miles to 80 miles (56 km to 129 km)1/16thHighway driving
35 miles (56km)1/16thSevere duty driving (trailer towing, extended idle)
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 209).
On (white light): Illuminates when you turn
the adaptive cruise control system on. Turns
off when you turn the speed control system
off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system engages.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
103
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have normal braking (without Anti-lock
braking system) unless the brake system
warning lamp is also illuminated. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Auto Hold Active
E197933
It illuminates when the system
holds your vehicle stationary.
Auto Hold Unavailable
E197934
It illuminates when the system is
on, but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)
It will illuminate to inform you when
the engine shuts down or in
conjunction with a message.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 223).
Brake System
E144522
It will illuminate when you engage
the parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that you do not have the parking brake
engaged. If you do not have the parking
brake engaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system malfunction. Have
the system checked immediately by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may occur.
It will take you longer to stop your vehicle.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. Driving extended distances with
the parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
Cruise Control
E71340
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you turn the left
or right direction indicator or the
hazard warning flasher on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 300).
104
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It will illuminate or flash when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric Parking
Brake (page 185).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 291).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 290).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 36).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control or the collision warning system.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
start your vehicle to make sure the display
works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
105
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system has
detected a powertrain or an
all-wheel drive fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after you
start the engine, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of your vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 170).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
When you first switch the ignition on, before
engine start, the service engine soon
indicator light illuminates to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is ready
for inspection maintenance testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until you crank the engine, and then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that your vehicle is not ready for inspection
maintenance testing. See Emission Control
System (page 170).
106
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction, the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 193).
Stability Control Off
E130458
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 193).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
107
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display controls
on the steering wheel. The information
display provides the corresponding
information.
Information Display Controls
E170369
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A check
in the box indicates the feature is
enabled, and unchecked indicates the
feature is disabled.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
E138660
Trip 1 & 2
E144640
Fuel Economy
E144639
Driver Assist
E100023
Settings
108
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
Trip 1 & 2
E138660
Choose between the standard or
enhanced trip display.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Trip 1 & 2
Normal or TowingDistance to E
Average fuel economy
Trip timer
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
• Trip odometer — shows the accumulated trip distance.
• Trip Timer— when you switch your vehicle off the timer stops and then restarts when you restart your vehicle.
• Average fuel economy — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
Fuel Economy
E144640
Use the left or right arrow buttons
to choose the desired fuel
economy display.
109
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Auto StartStop
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy: This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
• Auto StartStop - Available Auto Start-Stop messaging will provide details about what is happening with your system. See Information
Messages (page 114).
Driver Assist
E144639
Use the up or down arrow buttons
to choose between the following
display options.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warning
Cross Traffic
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
—On or DisplayDriver Alert
110
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Intelligent AWD
Alert, Aid or Alert + AidModeLane Keeping Sys
High, Normal or LowIntensity
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Settings
E100023
In this mode, you can configure
different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Normal or SportPerformance in S
Normal or TowingDTE Calculation
Easy Entry/Exit
111
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Auto Engine Off
Auto HighbeamLighting
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights
Welcome Lighting
AutounlockLocks
AudibleFeedback
Exterior Lights
Mislock
All Doors or Driver's DoorRemote Unlock
Switches Inhibit
AutofoldMirror
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Enable Switch or Disable SwitchPower Liftgate
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto Heated or OffFront Seats & Wheel
112
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
RemoteWindows
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Do Not Disturb
Traction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Speed Minder
Volume Limiter
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Choose your applicable settingDistance UnitDisplay
113
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Temperature Unit
Language
Speedo in km/h
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on your vehicle options
and instrument cluster type, not all of the
messages will display or be available. The
information display may abbreviate or
shorten certain messages.
E145981
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. The information display will
automatically remove other messages after
a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Active Park Fault
114
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 209).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 209).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 209).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking
Turned Off
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise control from engaging.Front Sensor Not Aligned
The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
The vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate
The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the
transmission into a lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Down
115
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor. Remove blockage.Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 76).Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
116
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
All-Wheel Drive
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating.AWD Temporarily Disabled
The all-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself from overheating or if you are
using the temporary spare tire.
AWD OFF
The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a
short distance with the road tire re-installed or after the system cools.
AWD Restored
The all-wheel drive system is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AWD Malfunction Service Required
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to Override
117
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Auto Start-Stop
ActionMessage
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal to start.Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine
The engine needs to be restarted, press the brake pedal harder to start.Auto StartStop Press Brake Harder to
Activate
The engine needs to be restarted, press any pedal to start.Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start
Engine
Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Select Neutral To Start
Engine
Select park for the system to restart the engine.Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart
Engine
The system is not functioning. A manual restart is required.Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required
Conditions are not met for the Auto StartStop system to function properly.Auto StartStop Not Available
118
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition. Your vehicle will
disable various features to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical loads as
soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
your ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once you
restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary
electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
119
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 223).Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 223).Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 223).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Collision Warning Malfunction
You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar sensor.
You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Collision Warning System (page 230).
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Collision Warning Not Available
120
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
The system has disabled the door switches.Switches Inhibited Security Mode
There is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Child Lock Malfunction Service Required
The factory keypad code displays in the information display after system resets the keypad.
See Keyless Entry (page 71).
Factory Keypad Code {X X X X X}
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
121
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer. See Auto Hold (page 187).Hill Start Assist Not Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake
The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See Keyless Starting (page 156).No Key Detected
You pressed the start/stop button to switch off the engine and your vehicle does not detect your
intelligent access key inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Full Accessory Power Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault
122
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key to the system.Key Program Successful
You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the system.Key Program Failure
You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the system.Max Number of Keys Learned
You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough Keys Learned
The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
Inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and the engine is on.Engine ON
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires you to clean the windshield in order for it to
operate properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
123
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 290).Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 290).Oil Change Required
The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 295).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Check Brake System
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The washer fluid is low, refill washer fluid.Washer Fluid Level Low
The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temperature.Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. See an authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Mode Contact Dealer
The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
124
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed Drive Safely
Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On - MyKey Setting
With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
125
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See
Front Parking Aid (page 195).
Check Front Park Aid
The system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized dealer. See
Rear Parking Aid (page 195).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If
the warning stays on after you have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
The electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied
The electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.Park Brake Maintenance Mode
The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it.Park Brake Use Switch to Release
126
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set but you have not released it and your vehicle is moving.To Release: Press Brake and Switch
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function Service
Required
You have not released the electric parking brake causing it to overheat.Park Brake System Overheated
The electric parking brake is set and you have started your vehicle.Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
You have released the electric parking brake.Park Brake Released
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
127
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Remote Start
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button to drive your vehicle after a remote
start.
To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift
Button
Seats
ActionMessage
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving
Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake
The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start your vehicle.Cranking Time Exceeded
The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start Pending Please Wait
The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled
128
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 332).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 332).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 332). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
The status of the traction control system after you switched it off or on. See Using Traction
Control (page 190).
Traction Control Off / Traction Control On
A spinout has occurred and the hazards are on.Spinout Detected Hazards Activated
129
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
Trailer
ActionMessage
Displays when the trailer sway control has detected a trailer sway. See Trailer Sway Control
(page 242).
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
Transmission
ActionMessage
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunction Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible.Transmission Overheating Stop Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service Required
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as possible.Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
The transmission has limited functionality. See an authorized dealer.Transmission Limited Function See Manual
The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.Transmission Warming Up Please Wait
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or recharging
the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
296).
Transmission Not in Park
The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted
The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission AdaptMode
130
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On
The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off
You have selected an invalid gear.Invalid Gear Selection
You need to depress the brake pedal.Press Brake Pedal
You need to depress the brake pedal before you can shift from P park.Depress Brake to Shift from Park
You need to press the N neutral button again to enter neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission
(page 173).
To Stay in Neutral When Exiting Vehicle
Select N Again
Neutral hold is active. See Automatic Transmission (page 173).Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged
Neutral hold is active. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 247).Stay in Neutral Tow Engaged See Manual
to Disable
There is a system fault and you need to depress the park brake before you exit your vehicle.
See an authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the Vehicle
There is a system fault and you need to depress the park brake before you exit your vehicle.
See an authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Cannot Shift Trans Use
Park Brake to Secure Vehicle
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required
There is a system fault while you are shifting your vehicle to P park. See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
131
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
There is a system fault while you are shifting your vehicle to R reverse. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
Neutral tow is active and you need to turn the ignition off. See Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels (page 247).
Neutral Tow Engaged Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
While attempting to exit neutral tow, you need to depress the brake pedal and select the P park
button to deactivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 247).
Neutral Tow Engaged Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit Neutral Tow
Neutral tow is active and you need to release the park brake. See Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels (page 247).
Neutral Tow Remove Park Brake for
Towing
You have switched off Neutral tow.Neutral Tow Disengaged
132
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
E211718
133
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when you switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.C
MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. The driver and passenger temperature settings are set to LO. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
D
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive
with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents. You can use A/C with recirculated air to improve performance
and efficiency.
E
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning may continue to operate even though the air
conditioning is switched off.
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
F
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency and reduce risk of fogging.
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 145).G
Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 146).H
DUAL: Press to switch separate passenger side temperature control on and off. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature
settings remain the same as the driver settings.
I
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature.
You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
J
134
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.K
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 136).M
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
135
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
Note: Depending on your remote start
settings, the heated windows, mirrors and
wipers may remain on after remote starting
the vehicle.
Heated Rear Window
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Press the button again to switch it off.
Note: An indicator on the button illuminates
when active.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Heated Wiper Park (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated wiper park automatically turns
on.
136
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
Your cabin air filter is located inside the
instrument panel and left of the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Maintenance (page 286).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your pre-selected
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. You cannot switch
on the displays or indicators during remote
start.
Switch the ignition on to return the system
to its previous settings. The following
features remain on if they automatically
turned on during remote start, or remain off
if they did not turn on during remote start.
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
Note: Passenger heated and cooled seats
only remain on during remote start if they
were on when you switched the vehicle off.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
108).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on pre-selected settings).
The rear defroster, heated mirrors and
heated seats do not automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated and cooled seats and
heated steering wheel are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically switch on.
137
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
138
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head
restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback (front seats only)
to an upright driving position before
adjusting the head restraint. Adjust the head
restraint so that the top of it is level with the
top of your head and as far forward as
possible. Make sure that you remain
comfortable. If you are extremely tall, adjust
the head restraint to its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E138643
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust (front seat
only) and unlock button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Fold button.E
Rear center head restraint
E211925
139
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
The rear center head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Front Seat Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Front Seat Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Rear Seat Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button E.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front seat head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
140
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver's seat or
WARNINGS
seatback when your vehicle is moving.
Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle
is in motion may cause loss of control of your
vehicle.
WARNINGS
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
141
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
E144632
142
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar
E165608
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver seat, power mirrors and
optional power steering column. The memory
control is located on the driver door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and
power steering column to your desired
position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
Note: A confirmation that a memory preset
is saved will appear in the information
display.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The seat, mirrors and steering column will
move to the position stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when you
place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on.
Note: Press any seat or mirror adjustment
switch (or any memory button) during a
memory recall to cancel the operation.
143
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Keyless Entry
(page 71).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off will
move the seat and steering column to the
Easy Entry position.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls or
intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone will sound
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in Step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to two inches (five
centimeters) when you switch the ignition
off. The driver seat will return to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 108).
REAR SEATS
E171298
144
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
Folding the Seatback
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to fold
the seatback forward. You may need to fold
the outboard head restraints and lower the
center head restraint first.
Unfolding the Seatback
Pull the seatback upward to unfold the
seatback.
Recline Adjustment
With the seat occupied, pull the lever up to
recline the seatback.
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The heated seats will only function
when the engine is running.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: After 90 minutes of operation, the
heated seats switch off. Press the heated
seat symbol to switch the heated seats on.
145
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
Note: Depending on your remote start
settings, the heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle. The
heated seats may also turn on when you
start your vehicle if they were on when your
vehicle was turned off.
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The heated seats will only function
when the engine is running.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
146
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The heated seats will only function
when the engine is running.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: After 90 minutes of operation, the
heated seats switch off. Press the heated
seat symbol to switch the heated seats on.
Note: Depending on your remote start
settings, the heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle. The
heated seats may also turn on when you
start your vehicle if they were on when your
vehicle was turned off.
Cooled Seats (If Equipped)
Note: The cooled seats will only function
when the engine is running.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
Note: Depending on your remote start
settings, the cooled seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle. The
cooled seats may also turn on when you
start your vehicle if they were on when your
vehicle was turned off.
REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)
E138656
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder.
147
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Seats
(If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are programming. Do
not program the system with the vehicle in
the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
148
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
149
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
150
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
151
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’ s authority
to operate the equipment.
152
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Do not use a power point for operating
a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the
power points can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This will damage
the power point and blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• Inside the luggage compartment.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so may cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when the
ignition is switched off or the battery voltage
drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
153
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
154
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
A
B
C
D
E171511
Front storage bin with auxiliary
power point and media hub.
A
Cup holder.B
Storage compartment with auxiliary
power point.
C
Auxiliary power point, 110 volt AC
power outlet (if equipped).
D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E224352
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
TICKET HOLDERS
E170447
Slide your toll ticket in the space provided.
155
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
156
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with remote
start, you can start your vehicle with the
remote, and then drive away by pressing the
brake pedal and pushing a button on the
transmission. This allows you to drive away
without pressing the engine start button.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in P.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
E170454
1. Open the center console lid.
2. Slide the remote into the back-up slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the START button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
the engine within 20 seconds of switching it
off, even if a valid key is not present.
157
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without the
key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If you
open and close a door while the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid key.
You cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds (without the engine starting)
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears in
the information display alerting you that you
exceeded the cranking time. You cannot
attempt to start the engine for at least 15
minutes. After 15 minutes, you are limited to
a 15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the
engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to inform
you that the engine has shut down in order
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic engine shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at
the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
158
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on (for the current ignition cycle only).
Use the information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 108).
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press OK
or RESET (depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily switch
the feature off (for the current ignition
cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put the
transmission in position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within two
seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and the leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
159
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
160
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
AUTO-START-STOP
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
by automatically shutting off and restarting
the engine while your vehicle is stopped.
The engine will restart automatically when
you release the brake pedal. In some
situations, your vehicle may restart
automatically, for example:
• To maintain interior comfort
• To recharge the battery
Note: Power assist steering is turned off
when the engine is off.
WARNINGS
The engine may restart automatically
if required by the system.
Switch the ignition off before opening
the hood or performing any
maintenance. Failure to do so may result in
serious injuries due to automatic engine
restart.
WARNINGS
Always switch the ignition off before
leaving your vehicle, as the system may
have turned the engine off, but the ignition
will still be on and automatic restart may
occur.
The Auto StartStop system status is available
at a glance within the information display.
See Information Displays (page 108).
Enabling Auto StartStop
The system is automatically enabled every
time you start your vehicle if the following
conditions are met:
• The Auto StartStop button is not pressed
(not illuminated).
• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed of
3 mph (5 km/h) after the vehicle has been
initially started.
• Your vehicle is stopped.
• Your foot is on the brake pedal.
• The transmission is in drive (D).
• The driver's door is closed.
• There is adequate brake vacuum.
• The interior compartment has been
cooled or warmed to an acceptable level.
• The front windshield defroster is off.
• The steering wheel is not turned rapidly
or is not at a sharp angle.
• The vehicle is not on a steep road grade.
• The battery is within optimal operating
conditions (battery state of charge and
temperature in range).
• The engine coolant is at operating
temperature.
• Elevation is below approximately
10,000 ft (3,048 m).
• Ambient temperature is moderate.
Note: The system allows multiple successive
Auto StartStop events, but it may not operate
in conditions of heavy traffic or in extended
low speed operation.
The green Auto StartStop indicator
light on the instrument cluster will
illuminate to indicate when the
automatic engine stop occurs.
161
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
E146361
If the instrument cluster is
equipped with a grey Auto
StartStop indicator light, it is
illuminated when automatic engine stop is
not available due to one of the above noted
conditions not being met.
Automatic Engine Restart
Any of the following conditions will result in
an automatic restart of the engine:
• Your foot is removed from the brake
pedal.
• You press the accelerator pedal.
• You press the accelerator and the brake
pedal at the same time.
• The driver safety belt becomes
unfastened or the driver door is ajar.
• The transmission is moved from drive (D).
• Your vehicle is moving.
• The interior compartment does not meet
customer comfort when air conditioning
or heat is on.
• Fogging of the windows could occur and
the air conditioning is on.
• The battery is not within optimal
operating conditions.
• The maximum engine off time is
exceeded.
• When you press the Auto StartStop
button while the engine is stopped
automatically.
• The heated windshield is turned on.
Any of the following conditions may result in
an automatic restart of the engine:
• The blower fan speed is increased or the
climate control temperature is changed.
• An electrical accessory is turned on or
plugged in.
Disabling Auto StartStop
E223639
Press the Auto StartStop button located on
the center console to switch the system off.
The button will illuminate. The system will
only be deactivated for the current ignition
cycle. Press the button again to restore Auto
StartStop function.
162
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
If your vehicle is in an Auto StartStop state
and you shift the transmission to reverse
while the brake is not depressed, a message
telling you to press the brake will appear.
You must press the brake pedal within 10
seconds, or a shift to park and a manual
restart will be required.
Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
message appears and the amber Auto
StartStop indicator light is flashing, automatic
restart is not available. The vehicle must be
restarted manually. See Information
Displays (page 108).
163
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out,
which could cause serious personal injury.
Fuels can cause serious injury or death
if misused or mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel may contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
164
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin,
wash the affected areas immediately with
plenty of soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience
any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a minimum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating
of 87. Some stations offer fuels posted as
regular with an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. We do not
recommend fuels with an octane rating
below 87. To provide improved performance,
we recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
165
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out
of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel
may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 166).
166
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow
any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will fill the
expansion space in the fuel tank and could
lead to fuel overflowing.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
167
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206911
A B
C D
Type 1: Left hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
A
Type 1: Right hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
B
Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
C
Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting
on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe
opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off
the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank
is full.
E206912
A B
168
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range. When refueling
your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates
empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still
present in the tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel for
driving. The usable capacity of the fuel tank
is the amount of fuel that can be put into the
tank after the gauge indicates empty. The
advertised capacity is the total fuel tank size
– it is the combined usable capacity plus the
empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving
(this is your engine’ s break-in period); a more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers -
4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense,
frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings
are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
169
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups, fill
the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles
traveled by gallons used (For Metric:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide
by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’ s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how
temperature impacts fuel economy. In
general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel
economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 472).
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford
parts should be the equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
170
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 167).
• driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
171
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments
may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from
getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
you may need to have the vehicle
serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may
need to perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours
without starting the engine. Then, start the
engine and complete the above driving
cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started, do not
turn off the engine until the above driving
cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not
ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat
the above driving cycle.
172
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
Turn the ignition off whenever you leave your
vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
Push Button Shift Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
transmission. The shift buttons are located
on the instrument panel next to the
touchscreen. The gears are selected by
pressing and releasing the PRNDS buttons.
E146223
Every time a gear is selected, the selected
button will light up. You will also see the gear
selected appear in the instrument cluster.
E155989
Understanding the Positions of your
Electronic Transmission
Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out of
park (P).
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on the
instrument panel of the gear you want to
select.
173
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Transmission
3. The gearshift button you select will
illuminate and the selected gear will
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
Note: If you attempt to leave your vehicle
while it is in gear, the vehicle will
automatically shift into park (P). Safety belt
and door monitors determine your intent and
make the shift for you. During this time, a
message will appear in the information
display screen prompting you to make the
shift.
Note: To put your vehicle in gear with the
door open, perform steps 1-4. See the
Automatic Return to Park section in this
chapter for more information on this feature.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the front
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P). An audible chime
sounds once you select park (P).
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle
will automatically shift into park (P). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into neutral (N) until
a slow enough speed is reached. The vehicle
will then shift into park (P) automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate when your
vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral
tow.
Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into park (P)
when any of the following conditions occur:
• You turn the ignition off
• You open the driver's door with your
safety belt unlatched
• Your safety belt is unlatched while the
driver's door is open
If you turn the ignition off while your vehicle
is moving, your vehicle will first shift into
neutral (N) until it slows down enough to shift
into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period
of time, (2-15 minutes) before starting your
vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will cause
this feature to activate, even with the driver's
door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your
door ajar indicator does not illuminate when
you open the driver’s door or the indicator
illuminates with the driver’ s door closed, see
your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission in neutral (N), you can
start your vehicle and it is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
174
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Transmission
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to
stay in neutral (N) when you exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this
mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the neutral (N) button on your
shifter assembly.
2. A message will appear in your
information display.
3. Press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Note: During this mode the N button will
flash continuously and your instrument
cluster will display N as the selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode
To disable Stay in Neutral mode select
another gear. See the Putting the Vehicle
in Gear for instructions on how to do this.
Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Drive (D)
The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy.
Sport (S)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
• Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy
• Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
Paddle Shifters
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by pressing the sport (S) button.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
175
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
mph (km/h)
Gear Upshift
ToFrom
15 mph (24 km/h)21
25 mph (40 km/h)32
40 mph (64 km/h)43
45 mph (72 km/h)54
50 mph (80 km/h)65
The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.
E155990
The transmission will automatically upshift if
your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.
Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you make another shift button selection.
For example, drive (D).
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
176
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Transmission
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park which
means the vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power. If vehicle battery
voltage is not sufficient, an external 12-volt
power source (for example, jumper cables,
battery charger or jump pack) may be
required to function the interlock override
switch.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction. If your vehicle has a dead
battery, an external power source will be
required.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
E180636
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access
slot. The slot is located in your center
console storage bin. The access slot
does not have a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the media
hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel will flash when
your vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, press
the neutral button (N) to shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in Neutral
mode for wrecker towing purposes or
can be shifted to the desired gear and
driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.
177
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature increases durability and provides
consistent shift feel over the life of your
vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm or soft shifts. This operation will
not affect function or durability of your
transmission and is normal. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, the
strategy must be relearned whenever the
battery is disconnected or a new battery is
installed.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if your engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to your transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to your transmission
and tires may occur, or your engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you can help rock your vehicle out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
178
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: When a system malfunction is present,
a warning message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 114). This means the system
is not functioning correctly and only
front-wheel drive is available. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: When the system overheats and
switches to front-wheel drive, a warning
message appears in the information display.
This may occur if you operate your vehicle
in extreme high load conditions or with
excessive wheel spin (for example, deep
sand). To resume all-wheel drive function,
stop your vehicle in a safe location and turn
off the ignition. When the system cools,
normal all-wheel drive function will return.
The information display indicates, for about
five seconds, this return.
Note: When using the spare tire, a warning
message may appear in the information
display. This message turns off after
reinstalling the repaired or replaced road
tire and you switch on the ignition.
Note: Re-install the repaired tire or replace
the tire as soon as possible. Different tire
sizes between the front and rear axles can
cause system damage, or turn off the
all-wheel drive.
This system anticipates wheel spin and
transfers power to the rear wheels before
the spin occurs. Even when wheel spin is not
occurring, the system is continuously
adjusting power distribution to the wheels,
in an attempt to improve straight line and
cornering, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on every time
you switch on the ignition.
The all-wheel drive system does not require
maintenance.
The all-wheel drive system gives your vehicle
some limited off-road capabilities. Operating
your vehicle in conditions other than
moderate sand, snow, mud or rough roads
could subject it to excessive stress and heat.
This could result in system damage. Your
vehicle warranty will not cover this damage.
E142669
The information display indicates the power
distribution between the front and rear
wheels. The more the area is filled the more
power is being distributed to that wheel.
Driving in Special Conditions With All-
Wheel Drive
All-wheel drive vehicles are capable of
driving on moderate sand, snow, mud and
rough roads. All-wheel drive has operating
characteristics that are somewhat different
from two-wheel drive, both on and off the
freeway.
Note: It may be useful to switch the traction
control off. This allows for more wheel spin
and engine torque in certain off road
conditions or if your vehicle becomes stuck.
179
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
When driving at slow speeds off road under
high load conditions, use a low gear when
possible. Low gear operation will maximize
the engine and transmission cooling
capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the air
conditioning may cycle on and off to prevent
the engine from overheating.
Basic Operating Principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds that
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfaces
made slippery by loose sand, water,
gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
Once you have reduced your vehicle speed,
ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
not turn the steering wheel sharply while
returning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of the
road and slow down gradually before
returning to the road. You may lose control
if you do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,
such as freeway reflectors, with minor
damage to your vehicle rather than attempt
an abrupt dangerous direction change.
Remember, your primary concern should be
your safety and the safety of others.
Emergency Maneuvers
If you must make a sudden emergency
direction change, avoid over-driving your
vehicle. Turn the steering wheel only as
rapidly and as far as you need to avoid the
emergency. Apply smooth pressure to the
accelerator pedal or brake pedal as needed.
Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration and
braking changes. Abrupt changes could
increase the risk of vehicle roll over, loss of
vehicle control and personal injury. Use all
available road surface to bring your vehicle
to under control.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding and do not attempt any sharp
steering wheel movements.
Your vehicle responds differently to steering,
accelerating and braking on different road
surfaces when changing from one type of
surface to another.
Sand
When driving over sand, avoid driving at
excessive speeds. This will cause your
vehicle momentum to work against you. Your
vehicle could become stuck that may require
assistance from another vehicle. Remember,
if you proceed with caution you may be able
to back out the way you came.
Do not drive in deep sand for an extended
period. This will cause the all-wheel drive
system to overheat. You will see a warning
message in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 114).
180
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
To resume operation, switch the ignition off
and allow the system to cool down for a
minimum of 15 minutes. After the system has
cooled down, you will see a brief message
display in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 114).
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Low gear operation will
maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Tips when driving over sand:
• Keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail.
• Shift to a lower gear.
• Apply the accelerator slowly.
• Drive steadily through the terrain.
• Avoid excessive wheel spin.
• Avoid reducing the tire pressures.
Mud and Water
Mud
Avoid sudden changes in vehicle speed or
direction when you are driving in mud. Even
all-wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in
mud. If your vehicle does slide, steer in the
direction of the slide until you regain control
of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off excess
mud stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
could damage drive components.
Water
Drive slowly through high water. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth and avoid water higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes will not stop your vehicle as
quickly as dry brakes. Apply light pressure
to the brake pedal while slowly moving the
vehicle to dry the brakes.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
axle is submerged in water, have the power
transfer unit (PTU) or rear axle serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, always try to drive
straight up or straight down the sloping
terrain.
Note: To maintain traction and avoid
possibly rolling your vehicle, avoid turning
on steep slopes or hills. When you drive on
a hill, determine beforehand the route you
will use. Do not drive over a hill without first
seeing what is on the other side. Do not drive
in reverse over a hill without the aid of an
observer.
181
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Start climbing a steep slope or hill in a low
gear rather than downshifting to a low gear
from a high gear after you have started your
climb. This reduces strain on the engine and
the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
around. Turning could cause the vehicle to
roll over. Instead, reverse back to a safe
location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, and you
could lose control of your vehicle.
E143949
To avoid brake overheating, come down a
hill in the same gear you used to go up the
hill. Do not come down in neutral. Move the
transmission selector lever to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking to keep the front wheels rolling
and to maintain your vehicle's steering.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. Apply the
brakes steadily. Do not pump the brake
pedal.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
In snow and ice, all-wheel drive vehicles have
advantages over two-wheel drive vehicles
but can still skid. When driving on snowy or
icy roads, should you start to slide, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide
until you regain control.
On snow and ice, avoid suddenly applying
power and avoid quick change of direction.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a stop.
Avoid sudden braking. An all-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice.
However, an all-wheel drive vehicle will not
stop any faster, as braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident to
road conditions.
182
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Make sure that you allow sufficient distance
between your vehicle and other vehicles for
stopping. On ice and snow, you should drive
more slowly than usual, and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, steadily apply the brake.
Your vehicle has a four wheel anti-lock brake
system, do not pump the brake pedal. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 184).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud or
snow, shift between forward and reverse
gears, and, in a steady pattern, stop between
shifts. Press lightly on the accelerator with
each shift. Rocking your vehicle this way may
dislodge your vehicle.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute, damage to the transmission and
tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle provides predictable
performance whether your vehicle is loaded
or empty. For this reason, we recommend
that you do not make modifications to your
vehicle (lift kits or stabilizer bars) or use
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or device
(ladder or luggage racks). Modifications to
your vehicle that raise the center of gravity
may cause your vehicle to tip if you should
lose vehicle control.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities, and adversely affect you and
your passenger's safety. We recommend that
you frequently inspect your vehicle's chassis
components if your vehicle is subject to
off-road use.
183
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 312).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 103).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
184
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Brakes
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and leave
your vehicle with the transmission in
position P.
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Applying the electric parking brake
WARNING
The brake system warning lamp will
flash during an electric brake apply. If
the brake system warning lamp continues to
flash there could be a problem with your
electric parking brake. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds if you have turned
the ignition off after the electric parking
brake has been applied, or the electric
parking brake has been applied after the
ignition has been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
E169085
Pull the switch to apply the electric parking
brake.
The brake system warning lamp will flash for
approximately 2 seconds then illuminate to
confirm that the electric parking brake has
been applied. See Instrument Cluster (page
101).
185
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Brakes
Applying the electric parking brake
when the vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use the
electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked), do not
apply the electric parking brake while the
vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions, emergency
braking can cause the vehicle to skid out of
control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
chime will sound. See Instrument Cluster
(page 101).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph (6
km/h), the braking force is applied as long
as the switch is applied. Release or press the
switch or press the accelerator pedal to stop
the braking force.
Releasing the electric parking brake
E169086
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the bottom of
the switch or automatically.
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after you
have released the parking brake, there could
be a problem with you braking system. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric parking
brake by turning the ignition on, pressing the
brake pedal and then pressing the electric
parking brake switch down.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn off.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the grade and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a slope.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
186
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Brakes
1. Pull the switch and hold it in this position.
2. Drive your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Automatic release - drive away release
Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if all of the following conditions
exist:
• The driver door is closed.
• The vehicle is accelerated.
• There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Note: The driver door must be closed and
the driver safety belt must be fastened
before this feature will operate.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch.
Note: The engine must be running and the
accelerator pedal must be pressed before
the drive away release feature will operate.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake has
been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has sufficient
drive force to move up the hill. To assure
drive away release when starting uphill,
press the accelerator pedal quickly.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or release
the electric parking brake if the battery
is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
AUTO HOLD
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. At all times, you
are responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The system will turn off if a malfunction
is apparent. Failure to take care may
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Auto Hold is a feature that uses your
vehicle's brake to hold your vehicle at a stop
once your vehicle has reached a standstill
condition. For example, Auto Hold can assist
you while stopping at traffic lights or while
in traffic jams by holding the brake pressure
for you once you bring your vehicle to a stop.
187
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Brakes
Switch Auto Hold off during vehicle or trailer
towing.
Note: In case of a malfunction in the system
while Auto Hold actively holds the vehicle
(for example, low power supply), a message
appears in the information display. If you see
this message, press the brake pedal
immediately.
Note: Auto Hold only activates if the system
recognizes it is applying enough brake
pressure. On a steep hill or incline, you may
need to press the brake pedal to activate
the Auto Hold system.
Note: When the parking brake automatically
applies, the red brake lamp appears. This is
normal. When you press the accelerator
pedal, the drive away release feature
automatically releases the parking brake.
Note: Auto Hold works on all road gradients
and in reverse (R).
E227185
Press the Auto Hold button to switch the
system on and off. The Auto Hold indicator
light illuminates in the Auto Hold button
when the system is on.
Note: You can only switch Auto Hold on if
you close the door and fasten your safety
belt.
Note: Auto Hold turns off every time you
power down your vehicle.
When Auto Hold is off, your vehicle behaves
the same as a vehicle without Auto Hold.
There is an Auto Hold indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster that has two modes, active
and unavailable:
E197933
The Auto Hold (ACTIVE) indicator
light illuminates in the information
display when the system holds
your vehicle stationary. When in active mode,
press the brake pedal and the Auto Hold
button to switch Auto Hold off.
E197934
The Auto Hold (UNAVAILABLE)
indicator light illuminates in the
information display when the
system is on but unavailable to hold your
vehicle (for example, during Active Park
Assist, Car Wash Mode, or when you do not
fasten your safety belt).
188
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Brakes
Using Auto Hold
1. Bring your vehicle to a stop by pressing
the brake pedal. After coming to a stop,
the green Auto Hold (ACTIVE) indicator
lamp illuminates in the information
display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The Auto Hold
(ACTIVE) indicator light remains
illuminated in the information display and
Auto Hold will hold your vehicle at a stop.
3. When you press the accelerator pedal,
Auto Hold will release the brakes and
you will be able to drive off. Once you
drive off, the green Auto Hold (ACTIVE)
indicator no longer illuminates in the
information display.
Note: The Stop/Start system (if equipped)
may stop the engine when you press the
brake pedal. If this occurs, it will restart once
you press the accelerator pedal. Auto Hold
still holds your vehicle at a standstill with the
engine off.
189
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the information display controls or the
switch. If the stability control and traction
control light is still illuminating steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with the
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General Information
(page 108).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off or
on.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
190
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Traction Control
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
191
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNINGS
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability control
or the traction control system, you may
experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction control
systems do not enhance your vehicle's
ability to maintain traction of the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the system applies higher
brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
192
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 190).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page
190).
193
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid
systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 58).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear
sensing system may detect that add-on
device and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the rear sensing
system when you attach an add-on device
to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 108).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 114).
194
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
FRONT PARKING AID
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) or neutral (N), and your vehicle is
moving but at a speed below 6 mph
(10 km/h).
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
195
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
When your vehicle approaches an object, a
warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning tone
repeat rate increases. The warning tone
sounds continuously when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when your vehicle is moving and the
detected obstacle is stationary or moving
towards your vehicle.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio warnings when your vehicle
is moving below a speed of 7 mph (12 km/h)
and an obstacle is located inside the
detection area.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - VEHICLES
WITH: ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Park Out Assist
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. You are
responsible at all times for controlling your
vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The sensors may not detect objects in
heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Active Park Assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the
active park assist button.
The system detects an available parallel or
perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly guides you to park your
vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system.
Park Out Assist automatically steers your
vehicle out of a parallel parking space
(hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly guides you to enter
traffic.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
The system may not correctly operate in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly
worn more than the other tires.
• One or more tires are improperly inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
196
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist).
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
• The weather conditions are poor (heavy
rain, snow, fog, etc).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer or
other object near the sensors on the front
or rear of your vehicle.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the center
stack once.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h) the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle. If the
direction indicators are not used, the system
defaults to the passenger side of your
vehicle.
197
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130107
Note: You can also activate the Active Park
Assist system after you have already driven
partially or completely past a parking space.
To do so, press the Active Park button and
the system will inform you if you have
recently passed a suitable parking space.
When the system finds a suitable space, it
displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the instructions on
the screen. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may need to pull forward a short
distance before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to the
other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or the
maneuver is interrupted (driver input), the
system switches off and you need to take
full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into reverse
(R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
198
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130108
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle to
a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is finished. You are responsible for
checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Perpendicular
Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the center
stack twice.
The system displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching either
to the left-hand side or right-hand side of
your vehicle.
Note: If you do not make a selection the
system will default to the passenger's side.
199
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
E186193
When the system finds a suitable space, it
displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the instructions on
the screen. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may need to pull forward a short
distance before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as possible
to the other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
E186191
200
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
When you shift the transmission into reverse
(R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle to
a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is finished. You are responsible for
checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Park Out Assist
E146186
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your vehicle
you want to exit the parking space.
E188012
201
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system determines the clearance to the
front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes.
The system visually and audibly guides you
to enter traffic.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it guides
you to take control of the steering to
complete the exit from the parking spot.
Note: If the clearance in front of your vehicle
allows easy departure, the Park Out Assist
feature might not be available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph
(5 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active
park search.
• Driving above approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) during automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied by
a tone. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
202
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with reverse [R] selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
203
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.
WARNINGS
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the luggage compartment
door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
204
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment door or liftgate is
open, no rear view camera features will
display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Whenever the battery is disconnected
or a new battery installed, you need to drive
your vehicle a short distance and your speed
must exceed 12 mph (20 km/h) so the system
can recalibrate the steering angle data in
order to reactivate active guidelines.
205
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not display
when the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle may not show. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
206
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
Camera System Settings
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display when
the transmission is not in reverse (R):
Main Menu
Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera delay
is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
207
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning displays.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E145976
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator changes color in the instrument
cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select kph as the display
measurement in the information display,
the set speed changes in approximately
2 kph increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display, the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
208
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You will
not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the ignition
off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions when using adaptive
cruise control. The system does not replace
attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to
the road may result in a crash, serious injury
or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
pedestrians or objects in the road.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Do not use adaptive cruise control on
winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could result
in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or
death.
Do not use the system in poor visibility,
for example fog, heavy rain, spray or
snow.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
when towing a trailer that has trailer
brakes. The auto-brake component of the
adaptive cruise control system does not
operate the trailer brakes. Using adaptive
cruise control when towing a trailer that has
trailer brakes may result in the loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system. Failure
to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select four gap settings.
E145977
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
209
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E144529
E164805
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in the
information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
E164805
5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your vehicle
does not decelerate automatically to a
stop, nor does your vehicle always
decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash
without driver intervention. Always apply the
brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning or
a delayed warning. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle
graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The system may provide slight temporary
acceleration when you use your driver side
direction indicator while following a lead
vehicle, for example to overtake.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
210
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
• The vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from
the vehicle in front. The system only applies
limited braking. You can override the system
by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system continues
to brake. A red warning bar displays on the
windshield and you must take immediate
action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E145978
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the image.
211
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic behaviorDistance gapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-
ated between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport.31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal.43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal.55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort.67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you switch the system on, it selects the last chosen gap setting.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase. The
last set speed displays with a strikethrough.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain a
gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system, the
green indicator light remains on,
but the vehicle graphic does not
appear in the information display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
212
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
• When you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information display
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed. The set speed changes in
approximately 5 mph/10 km/h increments.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES. Your vehicle speed
returns to the previously set speed and gap
setting. The set speed displays continuously
in the information display when the system
is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below 12 mph
(20 km/h). An audible warning sounds and
the automatic braking releases if the vehicle
drops below this speed.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
• The tires lose traction.
• The engine speed is too low.
• You apply the parking brake.
Note: If the engine speed drops too low a
message appears in the information display.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have
cooled.
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it
from overheating.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
213
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels
and safety barriers. In these cases, the
system may brake late or unexpectedly. At
all times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take
action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. See an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
214
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor
is located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. The system cannot detect
a vehicle ahead and do not function when
something obstructs the radar signals.
Note: You cannot see the sensor, it is behind
a fascia panel.
The following table lists possible causes and
actions for this message displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
215
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition
either self clears or clears after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of which
mode you have selected and apply the
brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, the system does not
automatically respond to vehicles ahead and
automatic braking is not active. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
216
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace your
attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform you that the
system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display. See General
Information (page 108). When activated, the
system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning.
System Display
When active the system will run automatically
in the background and only issue a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
General Information (page 108).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.
E131358
217
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the typical
range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change to
grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace the
driver’s attention and judgment. The driver
is still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph (64
km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands
on the steering wheel. The system may
detect a light grip or touch on the steering
wheel as hands off driving.
The system detects unintentional drifting
toward the outside of the lane and alerts or
aids you to stay in the lane through the
steering system and instrument cluster
display. The system automatically detects
and tracks the road lane markings using a
camera mounted behind the interior rear
view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey®
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey®,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
218
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system. You can only change the mode
and intensity settings.
E144813
Press the button located on the left
steering wheel stalk to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has two optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust them, select
Settings > Driver Assist > Lane Keeping Sys
in the information display using the OK
button on the steering wheel. The system
stores the last known selection for each of
these settings. You do not need to readjust
your settings each time you turn on the
system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features to enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center. If your
vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the
system will provide a steering wheel
vibration.
219
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not indicate
the exact zone coverage area.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the alert
and alert + aid modes. This setting is not valid
for the aid mode.
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E151660
When you turn the system on, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
display in the information display. If you turn
the system on and select aid mode, arrows
will display along with the lane markings.
When you turn the system off, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
Note: If adaptive cruise control is enabled
the overhead vehicle graphic may still be
displayed.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• Your turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain, fog),
traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
You can temporarily disable the system at
any time by doing the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
220
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Using the turn signal indicator. • Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
221
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified
222
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
beyond the bumper. The system is designed
to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into
reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information
System turns back on when you drive your
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears except
the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
223
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from. When
the Blind Spot Information System is alerting
on a vehicle and the corresponding turn
signal is ON, the Blind Spot Information
System alert indicator flashes as an
increased warning level.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
Note: The alert indicator flashes in case of
an alert and the turn signal is set to that side
at the same time.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow
in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy
rain can cause system degradation. Also,
other types of obstructions in front of the
sensor can cause system degradation. This
is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the BLIS alert
indicators will remain ON and BLIS will no
longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning but
the alert indicators will remain illuminated.
224
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two
ways:
• After the blockage in front of the sensors
is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate
decreases or stops, drive for a few
minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to
detect passing vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Blind Spot Information
System off. If your vehicle has a tow bar but
no factory equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off manually. Operating
the Blind Spot Information System with a
trailer attached will cause poor system
performance.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
114).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page 108).
When the Blind Spot Information System
switches off, you will not receive alerts and
the information display shows a system off
message. The telltale in the cluster also
illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot
Information System on or off, the alert
indicators flash twice.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
remembers the last selected on or off setting.
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic
Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while
your transmission is in reverse (R).
225
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detect
vehicles that approach with a speed up to
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases when
the sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Reversing slowly helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
226
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
227
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also
sounds an audible alert and a message
appears in the information display indicating
a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse
sensing system that sounds its own series
of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 195).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 223). If the Blind Spot
Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic
Alert is also blocked. A corresponding
message appears in the information display
as soon as you shift the transmission into
reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).
228
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with a
factory equipped trailer tow module and it
is towing a trailer, the sensors will
automatically turn the Cross Traffic Alert off.
If your vehicle has a tow bar but no factory
equipped trailer tow module, it is
recommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alert
off manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alert
with a trailer attached will cause poor Cross
Traffic Alert performance.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will appear
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 114).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 108). When you switch
Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display will display
a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at an
authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you may
not feel a difference in the steering,
however a serious condition may exist.
Obtain immediate service from an authorized
dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
229
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is an extra driving aid. It
does not replace your attention and
judgment, or the need to apply the brakes.
This system does NOT automatically brake
your vehicle. If you fail to press the brake
pedal when necessary, you may collide with
another vehicle.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace your judgment and the need to
maintain correct distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
230
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
E156130
The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
E156131
When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red warning light flashes
and a tone sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by pre-charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision continues
to increases after the audio-visual warning,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. The system does not
automatically activate the brakes, but if the
brake pedal is pressed even lightly, the
brakes apply full stopping power.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support reduces collision speed only
if you brake your vehicle before any collision.
As in any typical braking situation, you must
press your brake pedal.
You can use your information display control
to adjust the warning system's sensitivity to
any one of three possible settings. See
General Information (page 108).
Note: When possible, the manufacturer
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
108).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is located
behind a cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. If anything blocks the sensor,
your vehicle cannot see through the sensor,
and the collision warning system will not
work. Possible causes for the blocked sensor
message and corrective actions are listed
below.
231
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the obstructionThe radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty or obstructed
Wait a short time. The radar may take several minutes to reset after
you remove the obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is clean but the message
remains in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after
weather conditions improve, the collision warning system automatically
reactivates
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air interferes with the radar
signals
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Shortly after
weather conditions improve, the collision warning system automatically
reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road surface interferes with the
radar signals
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support only reduces collision speed
if you first apply your brakes. You must brake
as you would in any typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These
include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of the vehicle may
alter the radar sensor's coverage area. This
may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
232
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Adaptive steering optimizes your
vehicle's steering response based on
your steering wheel input, changes in
vehicle speed and other conditions.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or in Sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
233
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle’s Drive Control
settings from the main menu on the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode
selections within the information display,
preventing you from changing states when
the gear position is changed. Other types of
errors will produce a temporary message
that states Drive Control Malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
234
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If Equipped)
E142445
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
LUGGAGE COVERS
WARNINGS
Make sure that the posts are properly
latched in mounting features. The
cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or
accident if it is not securely installed.
WARNINGS
Do not place any objects on the cargo
area shade. They may obstruct your
vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in
a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E142447
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod into
the retention slots located on the rear
quarter trim panels.
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low center of
gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers
of gravity, may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
235
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
The maximum recommended load is 50 lb
(22 kg) for vehicles with a panoramic roof,
and 80 lb (36 kg) for vehicles without a
panoramic roof. For vehicles with
Continuously Controlled Damping
suspension, the maximum recommended
load is 80 lb (36 kg), regardless of roof type.
Evenly distribute the load on the roof rack.
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The intended design of the roof panel
is not to directly carry a load.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section guides you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both.
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within
its design rating capability, with or
without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before you
load your vehicle, become familiar with
the following terms for determining your
vehicle’s weight rating, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
236
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combined weight of cargo
and passengers that your vehicle is
carrying. The maximum payload for your
vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading
label. The label is either on the B-pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada
may not have a tire and loading label.
Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for
maximum payload. The payload listed
on the Tire and Loading Information
label is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If
you install any additional equipment on
your vehicle, you must determine the
new payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire and Loading label. When towing,
trailer tongue weight or king pin weight
is also part of payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
237
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight
that a single axle (front or rear) can carry.
These numbers are on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes
all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo. It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the
highest possible weight of a fully loaded
trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
Towing Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the vehicle and the loaded trailer,
including all cargo and passengers, that
the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated for
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
238
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
239
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
front or the rear gross axle weight rating
specified for your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Take extra precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
240
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of the
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Your vehicle may have electrical items,
such as fuses or relays, related to
towing. See Fuses (page 267).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in
another chapter of this manual. See
Load Limit (page 236).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
241
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature except
in situations where speed reduction may be
detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver
has significant trailer towing experience, and
can control trailer sway and maintain safe
operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine torque
to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control warning lamp
flashes and a message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 114). Slow your vehicle
down, pull safely to the side of the road and
check for correct load distribution.
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Be sure to take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 20
feet
2
(1.86 meters
2
) if your vehicle is not
equipped with a towing package or 30
feet
2
(2.79 meters
2
) if your vehicle is
equipped with a towing package.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point.
242
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided
the maximum trailer weight is less than
or equal to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle configuration on
the following chart.
Maximum trailer weight
1
Maximum GCWRPowertrain
2000 lb (907 kg)6220 lb (2821 kg)
2.0L GTDI FWD
2
2000 lb (907 kg)6400 lb (2903 kg)
2.0L GTDI AWD
2
2000 lb (907 kg)6420 lb (2912 kg)
2.3L GTDI AWD
2
3000 lb (1361 kg)7220 lb (3275 kg)
2.0L GTDI FWD
3
243
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
Maximum trailer weight
1
Maximum GCWRPowertrain
3000 lb (1361 kg)7400 lb (3357 kg)
2.0L GTDI AWD
3
3000 lb (1361 kg)7420 lb (3366 kg)
2.3L GTDI AWD
3
1
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2
Without trailer towing package.
3
With trailer towing package.
244
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 236).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500
pounds (680 kilograms) when load.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
245
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
246
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime you
submerge the rear axle in water. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being towed.
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• You place the vehicle in Stay in Neutral
mode. See Placing Your Vehicle in Stay
in Neutral Mode. In addition, make sure
to read the brake-shift interlock override
procedure. See Automatic Transmission
(page 173).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Placing Your Vehicle in Stay in Neutral
Mode
1. Press the N button on the shifter
assembly.
2. When Press N again to Enter Stay in
Neutral Mode appears in the information
display, press the N button again.
Note: The message Stay in Neutral Mode
Engaged appears in the information display
when you successfully complete the
procedure.
Note: Keeping the vehicle in Stay in Neutral
mode eventually causes your vehicle battery
to lose charge. Exit the mode as soon as
safely possible.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 133).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed
these guidelines to prevent damage to your
transmission.
247
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
All-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.
248
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the conditions
you drive under, and how you maintain your
vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at
55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than
traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb
[180 kilogram] of weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of alignment.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce fuel
economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive with
the tonneau cover installed (if equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10 miles
(12–16 kilometers) of driving.
249
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Hints
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel
economy as compared to driving on hilly
terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top cruise
gear and with steady pressure on the gas
pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped)
is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive
operation.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
250
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.
WARNINGS
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
251
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 68,351 mi (110,000 km)
(whichever comes first) within the
extended powertrain warranty coverage
period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of
diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 98 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 99 mi (160 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 99 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 99 mi (160 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within 99 mi
(160 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Lincoln Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
252
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-5333.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your wallet
for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove compartment of your
vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.
253
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
personal injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
Use only an adequate-sized cable with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch. Turn all accessories
off.
254
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables. Battery positions may
vary.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
E152134
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, or connect the
negative (-) cable to the ground
connection point, if available.
255
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
rpms, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. After starting the disabled vehicle, run
both vehicle engines for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting the
jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface or connecting
point, if available.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.
After starting your disabled vehicle and
removing the jumper cables, allow your
vehicle to idle for several minutes so the
battery can recharge.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
256
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service, or if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Lincoln
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Lincoln Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
257
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
258
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
259
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
260
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
261
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
262
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
263
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing [email protected].
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
264
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada
and Ford of Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-index-76.htm (English)Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-index-76.htm (French)Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
265
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
266
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Pre-Fuse Box
The pre-fuse box is in the engine
compartment attached to the positive battery
post. This box contains several high current
fuses. If you need to replace one of these
high current fuses, see an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect your vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
You will need to reset some features if you
disconnect and reconnect the battery. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 296).
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
267
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
E157389
268
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Anti-lock brake system module.
50A
2
F7
Anti-lock brake system module.
30A
2
F8
Fuel pump relay.
20A
2
F9
Blower motor relay.
40A
2
F10
Run start relay.
30A
2
F11
Powertrain control module relay.
40A
2
F12
Starter relay.
30A
2
F13
Memory seat.
30A
2
F14
Wipers and washers relay.
30A
2
F15
Cooling fan.
25A
2
F16
Cooling fan 1 (600W).
40A
2
F17
269
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Cooling fan 1 (750W).
50A
2
Cooling fan 2 (600W).
40A
2
F18
Cooling fan 2 (750W).
50A
2
Anti-lock brake system module run/start.
5A
1
F19
Horn relay.
20A
1
F20
Brake pedal switch.
10A
1
F21
Windshield wipers and washer.
25A
1
F22
Run/start relay coil.
5A
1
F23
Transmission range control module.
20A
1
F24
Air conditioning clutch relay.
10A
1
F25
Powertrain control module relay coil.
5A
1
F26
Washer pump relay.
10A
1
F27
270
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Alternator sensor.
10A
1
F28
Rain sensor.
15A
1
F29
Rear wiper.
Washer pump relay coil.
Left-hand headlamp.
20A
1
F30
Right-hand headlamp.
20A
1
F31
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).
15A
1
F32
Vehicle power 2 (canister vent solenoid, universal exhausted
gas oxygen sensor, variable camshaft timing, catalyst monitor
sensor, canister purge solenoid).
15A
1
F33
Vehicle power 3 (A/C clutch control relay coil, variable A/C
compressor, fan control relay coil, engine charge air bypass
valve solenoid, active grill shutters).
15A
1
F34
Vehicle power 4 (ignition coils).
15A
1
F35
Not used.—F36
Not used.—F37
271
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Voltage quality module run/start (vehicles equipped with
stop/start).
15A
1
F38
Powertrain control ignition start power - run.
5A
1
F39
Electronic power assist steering run/start.
10A
1
F40
Extended power module run/start.
10A
1
F41
Adaptive cruise control.
10A
1
F42
Blind spot information system.
Heads-up display.
Rear video camera.
(vehicles not equipped with stop/start)
Not used.—F43
Heated rear window relay coil.
5A
1
F44
Heated wiper park.
Electronic transmission pump run/stop feed (vehicles
equipped with stop/start).
Transmission range control module run/start.
5A
1
F45
Heated rear window relay.
40A
2
F46
Heated wiper park.
272
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Electronic transmission pump B+ feed (vehicles equipped
with stop/start).
30A
1
F47
Not used.—F48
1
Mini fuse.
2
J-case fuse.
Circuits switchedRelay
Run start.R1
Horn.R2
Fuel pump.R3
Rear window washer pump.R4
Cooling fan relay 3 (750W).R5
Windshield wipers.R6
Cooling fan relay 1 (600W).R7
Cooling fan relay 5 (750W).
Starter.R8
Not used.R9
273
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Circuits switchedRelay
Cooling fan relay 4 (750W).R10
Air conditioning clutch.R11
Cooling fan relay 1 (750W).R12
Cooling fan relay 3 (600W).
Cooling fan relay 2.R13
Powertrain control module.R14
Heated rear window.R15
Heated wiper park.
Blower motor.R16
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
The fuse panel is behind the lower end of
the glove box.
274
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
E145984
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome, cargo).
10A
1
1
Memory seats.
7.5A
1
2
Driver door unlock.
20A
1
3
275
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used (spare).
5A
1
4
Subwoofer amplifier.
20A
1
5
THX amplifier.
Not used (spare).
10A
2
6
Not used (spare).
10A
2
7
Not used (spare).
10A
2
8
Not used (spare).
10A
2
9
Keypad.
5A
2
10
Power liftgate logic.
Not used (spare).
5A
2
11
Climate control.
7.5A
2
12
Gear shift control.
Push-button ignition.
Cluster.
7.5A
2
13
Datalink module logic.
Steering column module logic.
276
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used (spare).
10A
2
14
Datalink module.
10A
2
15
Not used (spare).
15A
1
16
Cellphone passport module.
5A
2
17
Not used (spare).
5A
2
18
Not used (spare).
7.5A
2
19
Not used (spare).
7.5A
2
20
Humidity and in-car temperature.
5A
2
21
Occupant classification system.
5A
2
22
Delayed accessory (driver window switch, moonroof logic,
power inverter logic).
10A
1
23
Central lock and unlock.
20A
1
24
277
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Driver door (window, mirror).
30A
1
25
Front passenger door (window, mirror).
30A
1
26
Moonroof.
30A
1
27
THX amplifier.
20A
1
28
Rear driver side door (window).
30A
1
29
Rear passenger side door (window).
30A
1
30
Not used (spare).
15A
1
31
Display.
10A
1
32
GPS.
Radio frequency receiver.
Voice control.
Radio and active noise control.
20A
1
33
Run/start bus (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker).
30A
1
34
278
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Restraints control module.
5A
1
35
Auto-dimming rear view mirror.
15A
1
36
Continuous control damping suspension.
Lane keeping system module.
Rear heated seats module.
All-wheel drive relay.
20A
1
37
Heated steering wheel.
Not used (spare).30A38
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
Rear Cargo Fuse Box
The fuse panel is located in the cargo area
on the passenger side. Open the fuse panel
cover to gain access to the fuses.
279
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
E228853
280
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Not used.—F1
Not used.—F2
Hands-free liftgate module.
5A
1
F3
Not used.—F4
Not used.—F5
Not used.—F6
Rear heated seats.
30A
2
F7
Power cinch latch.
30A
2
F8
Power liftgate.
Heated front seats.
20A
2
F9
Trailer tow.
40A
2
F10
Climate control seats.
30A
2
F11
Auxiliary power point - instrument panel.
20A
2
F12
Not used.—F13
281
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse
Power seats.
30A
2
F14
Auxiliary power point - inside of floor console.
20A
2
F15
Auxiliary power point - rear of floor console.
20A
2
F16
Not used.—F17
Auxiliary power point - cargo area.
20A
2
F18
Inverter power outlet.
40A
2
F19
1
Mini fuse.
2
J-case fuse.
Circuits switchedRelay
Not used.R1
282
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating
can cause severe wire damage and could
start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
283
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
284
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
285
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Inside your vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
286
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
E142458
2. Go to the front of your vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold
it open.
4. To close the hood, lower the hood and
apply closing force as it drops the last 8
to 11 inches (20 to 30 centimeters).
287
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
A B C
D E F
G
H
E171684
288
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine coolant reservoirA
Engine oil dipstickB
Engine oil filler capC
Brake fluid reservoirD
BatteryE
Power distribution boxF
Air filter assemblyG
Windshield washer fluid reservoirH
289
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
E170468
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Check the oil level before starting the
engine, or switch the engine off and wait
15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 344).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is between
the minimum and the maximum marks.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes for
the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
290
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Remove the engine oil filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 344).
3. Wipe off any spilled oil.
4. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned
if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
291
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
the cap is loosened slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant
or windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. This damage would not be
covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
this color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the engine
coolant to be replaced.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 472).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the coolant
reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such
as Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
292
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Adding Engine Coolant
• Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. The use of an improper coolant
may harm engine and cooling system
components and may void the warranty.
Use prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 344).
• In case of emergency, a large amount of
water without engine coolant may be
added in order to reach a vehicle service
location. In this instance, the cooling
system must be drained, chemically
cleaned with Motorcraft Premium Cooling
System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause
engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the engine coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will
escape as you unscrew the cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the
Ford specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 344).
Whenever coolant has been added, the
coolant level in the coolant reservoir should
be checked the next few times you drive the
vehicle. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level to
the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant since a Ford-approved
recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point protection.
Engine coolant concentrations above
60% will decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
293
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the freeze and
corrosion protection characteristics of
the engine coolant and may cause
engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this
feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance
depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
A high engine temperature
message will appear in the
information display.
The service engine soon indicator
will light.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine will
automatically switch to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate.
However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine
temperature and the engine will completely
shut down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
294
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine will run rough. Remember that the
engine is capable of completely shutting
down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. Arrange for your vehicle to be taken to
an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if
low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance of
engine damage. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
The automatic transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, for example if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid
could result in the loss of vehicle control,
serious personal injury or death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage or failure.
Failure to adhere to this warning could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to add
fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating
range could compromise the performance
of the system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
295
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
344).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 344).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
WARNINGS
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
296
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle has a battery cover,
after cleaning or replacing the battery, make
sure you reinstall it.
Note: See an authorized dealer for battery
access, testing, or replacement.
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the battery. Some engine
computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy, optimize the driveability and
performance of the engine. The clock and
radio station presets are also maintained in
memory by power from the low-voltage
battery. These settings are erased when a
technician disconnects and connects the
low-voltage battery.
To restore the settings, do the following:
Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 362). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 93). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 362).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the battery monitor system is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
297
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
Front Wiper Blades
E129990
1
1
2
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
298
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Rear Window Wiper Blade
E183236
1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The assembly plant properly aims the
headlamps on your vehicle. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, have the alignment
of your headlamps checked by your
authorized dealer.
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8
foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
light the wall or screen and open the
hood.
299
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
E142465
4. On the wall or screen, you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light located
at the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, you will need to adjust the
headlamp.
E171165
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is non-adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp assembly,
you must first remove the front fascia and
front bumper assemblies. We recommend
you see an authorized dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp (If
Equipped)
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
300
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Front Direction Indicator
E171167
1. Remove the headlamp. See Removing
a Headlamp (page 300).
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Side direction indicators.
• Approach lamp.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Reversing lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
License Plate Lamp
3
2
1
E72789
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Remove the lamp.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
The specified replacement bulbs are in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T.
(Department of Transportation) for North
America to affirm lamp performance, light
brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp
assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty
and will provide quality bulb burn time.
301
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
Trade numberFunction
D3S* Headlamp (high intensity discharge) Low/High
LED* Sidemarker - front
LED* Park lamp - front
7444NA* Turn lamp - front
LEDSignal indicator mirror lamp
LEDWelcome light
LEDApproach lamp
LED* Tail/brake lamp
LED* Turn lamp - rear
LED* Backup lamp
W5WLicense plate lamp
LED* High-mount brake lamp
LED* Interior lamps
* To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
To replace instrument panel lights, see your authorized dealer.
302
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not start
your engine with the air cleaner removed.
Do not remove the air cleaner while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed in the
Motorcraft Parts table. See Motorcraft Parts
(page 346).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
472).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E171370
1. Loosen the four fasteners and remove
the air cleaner assembly lid.
2. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
3. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air
cleaner assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
E170433
303
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
4. Install the new air filter element. Slide the
open end of the air filter element in first,
below the tab. Then push the closed end
of the air filter into the bottom of the tray.
The closed end should fit inside the
groove in the tray. The tab of the closed
end of the air filter should be oriented
down and fit between the forks on the
tray as shown at the arrow above.
Note: Make sure you align the tab in the air
filter element with the fork in the air cleaner
assembly tray.
5. Install the air cleaner assembly lid and
tighten the four fasteners.
304
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash
ZC-3-A
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
305
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
ZC-23 (U.S.)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
306
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from under
the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel
and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
307
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’ s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
311).
308
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
309
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
311).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
310
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
311
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS (If
Equipped)
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
312
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
313
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
314
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death from a rollover or other crash you
must avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the
conditions, keep tires properly inflated, never
overload or improperly load your vehicle,
and make sure every passenger is properly
restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants
must wear seat belts, and children and
infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
All-wheel drive system (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of all-wheel-drive vehicles.
Although an all-wheel-drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it will not
stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with all-wheel drive has
the ability to use all four wheels to power
itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
For all-wheel-drive vehicles, a spare tire of
a different size other than the tire provided
should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or
major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the
all-wheel-drive system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive.
315
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
316
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often will have a higher center of gravity and
a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
317
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
318
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending
on tires size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
319
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
320
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Speed ratingLetter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
321
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
322
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
323
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
324
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 11°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example, driven
more than 1 mi (1.6 km), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot
from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure
the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
325
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke
a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
326
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear on
the tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
327
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
WARNINGS
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding
tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
328
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
Do not spin the wheels over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
329
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment.
Have an authorized dealer check the
wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear,
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly, it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Non-directional tires
E142547
330
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Directional tires
E70415
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size, load
index, speed rating as those originally
provided by Ford. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions.
• Use 10 mm cables or chains only on front
axle with 235/50R18 tires.
• Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device.
• The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the front axle.
• Do not use chains or cables on
235/45R19 and 245/45R19 tires.
• Install cables securely, verifying that the
cables do not touch any wiring, brake
lines or fuel lines.
• When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If this does not work,
remove the cables to prevent vehicle
damage.
• Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on dry
roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
331
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this
chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
332
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
333
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
334
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
335
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended
inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low
tire pressure warning light is on, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If
one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.
WARNINGS
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 332). If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 332).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
336
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
337
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent your vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack, even if the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P) or
neutral (N), set the parking brake, and block
(in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
your vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
3. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
E160855
5. Remove the jack from the foam holder.
The lug wrench is located in the left side
storage foam next to the spare tire.
Remove the flat tire retainer strap from
the jack base.
338
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E142551
6. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
7. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
8. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E145908
9. Small arrow-shaped marks on the sills
show the location of the jacking points.
E162190
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Note: If equipped with full wheel covers with
exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel nuts
prior to removing the wheel cover or damage
to the wheel cover may occur.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
339
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
13. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 342).
Stowing the flat tire
1. Put the jack and lug wrench away. Make
sure the jack is fastened so it does not
rattle when you drive.
2. Unblock the wheels.
3. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the cargo
area. Secure with the flat tire retainer
strap by following the next steps:
E142906
4. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
strap through the tie-down. Thread the
non-loop end through the loop.
E157926
5. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
6. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
opposite corner of the cargo area to the
tie-down used in Step 4. Thread the
retainer strap through the tie-down and
pull tight.
7. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
340
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E143746
341
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
342
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
343
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationMeasurement
122Cubic inches.
1-3-4-2Firing order.
Coil on plugIgnition system.
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)Spark plug gap.
9.3:1Compression ratio.
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
A. The long drivebelt is on the first pulley
groove closest to the engine.
B. The short drivebelt is on the second
pulley groove farthest from the engine.
344
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
SpecificationMeasurement
138Cubic inches.
9.5:1Compression ratio.
0.027-0.031 in. (0.70-0.80 mm)Spark plug gap.
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
A. The long drivebelt is on the first pulley
groove closest to the engine.
B. The short drivebelt is on the second
pulley groove farthest from the engine.
345
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft part numberComponent
FA-1908Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-48H6-610Battery (without start/stop)
BAGM-48H6-760Battery (with start/stop)
SP-537Spark plugs
FP70Cabin air filter
WW-2550 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1575 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet
or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 472).
346
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Motorcraft part numberComponent
FA-1908Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-48H6-610Battery
SP-537Spark plugs
FP70Cabin air filter
WW-2550 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1575 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet
or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 472).
347
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
348
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The following
table shows the transmission code along
with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
349
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
8.6 qt (8.1 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
*
Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
16.2 gal (61.3 L)Fuel tank
350
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant
2.7 fl oz (80.32 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
351
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico) :
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
352
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
353
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
354
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
355
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)
8.1 qt (7.7 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15 L)Rear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
*
Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
16.2 gal (61.3 L)Fuel tank
356
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant
2.7 fl oz (80.32 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
357
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid:
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
358
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
359
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
360
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
361
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in Ford
CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
362
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
363
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Audio System
Note: The touch system controls most of the
audio features. See your SYNC information.
E223457
364
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Audio System
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Press to eject a CD.B
TUNE: In radio mode, adjust to manually search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous
or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), turn to find the previous or next channel in the selected
category.
C
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press either button. The system stops at the first
station it finds in that direction. In CD mode, press to select the next or previous track. Press and hold to move quickly forward or
backward through the current track.
D
Volume and Power: Press to switch the system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.E
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
You can locate the media hub inside the
center console or on the instrument panel.
E211463
See your SYNC information.
365
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can simply
touch the item or option that you want to
select. The button changes color when you
select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
366
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205444
367
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate
settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view.HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's
GPS location. See Settings (page 434).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside TemperatureD
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature.Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access to
all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment options.
Using the status and feature bar you can
quickly select the feature you want to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status bar
depending on market, vehicle options and
current operation. If a feature is not active,
the icon does not display. Certain icons may
move to the left or right depending on what
options are active.
368
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E223130
369
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system.Driver TemperatureA
When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon
displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering
wheel.
Heated steering wheelB
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the
driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are
linked, the passenger's temperature does not display.
Passenger TemperatureC
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you.Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows
more details about the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.RoamingI
This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone.Text MessageJ
370
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC.911 Assist OffK
The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is an active Bluetooth alert.Bluetooth AlertL
This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth connection.BluetoothM
Messages may also appear in the status bar
to provide you with notifications. You can
select the message to view the associated
feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can
control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs,
and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within
the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook
of your connected device.
Phone
371
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get
driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along
your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone
or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where
your settings and power information is located.
You can customize your system with various settings for the touch-
screen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact
with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth
and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on what
is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar indicating
the status of the voice command session.
See Using Voice Recognition (page 385).
372
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some of
the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible in the center
of the display (A).
373
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E185883
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3 screen:
374
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Audio
Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Navigation
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on
cluster level), and ability to cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *Phone
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll callsQuick dial
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
375
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if
the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of
the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and hold
to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or
switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject
an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be
combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK
PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE
ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 78).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
• Power: Switch the audio system on and
off.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system.
• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
advance through available media modes.
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 362).
376
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
• DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
• Temperature, fan and climate control
buttons: Control the temperature, fan
speed or settings of the climate control
system. See Climate Control (page 133).
911 Assist
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not dial
for help which could delay response time,
potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately to
avoid delayed response time which could
increase the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist
within five seconds of the crash, the system
or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
WARNINGS
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone
which could prevent 911 Assist from working
properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains and
Roadside Emergencies sections of your
owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings (page
434).
377
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible cell
phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers
for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone
sustains damage or loses its connection to
SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for
and try to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of the
fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
378
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer check
your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables out
of the way, so they do not interfere with
the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure
that you review your device's manual
before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, such
as Point of Interest reviews and ratings,
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link sports
scores, movie times or ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
379
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Demo navigation route.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
380
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
• Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
MyLincoln Mobile™ with Embedded
Modem (If Equipped)
Connect to your vehicle using the MyLincoln
Mobile app on your smartphone. The
embedded modem in your vehicle
communicates with the app and allows you
to start, lock, unlock and locate your vehicle
remotely. The app also connects you with
other vehicle resources like a parking locator,
roadside assistance, dealer locations and
Lincoln Support. MyLincoln Mobile is
supported by Android and iPhone and it is
available through the App Store and Google
Play. The MyLincoln mobile app is available
through a free download. Services included
for four years. Text and data rates apply to
usage.
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log into
your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to start
the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your use
of the system. Navigation updates cannot be
installed in the background, because the files
are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle, remove
anything that is plugged in the USB ports on
the media hub and plug in the USB drive
containing the update. When the USB drive
is plugged in, the installation should begin
immediately. After a successful installation,
the update is available the next time the
vehicle is started.
381
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
When the installation is complete, take the
USB drive back to the computer to report
the update. Log into your owner account and
return to the SYNC software update page
and confirm that you have installed the
update. Insert the USB drive used for the
update into your computer and choose to
report your update. The website updates
your records to reflect your current software
version.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your Wi-
Fi network. You may have
to enter the security code if
the network is secured. The
system confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available Wi-
Fi Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature. If
you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 434). You can also perform a
master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting
(page 451).
If you would like to switch this feature on
later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system prompts
you to set up a Wi-Fi
connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your vehicle
off. The updates do not interrupt the normal
use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download
does not complete for any reason, the
382
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
download continues where it left off at the
next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon
activation of an update, a banner displays
on the touchscreen indicating the system
update. Select the icon to see more detail.
This icon displays for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection for
automatic updates to OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-521-4140.
Canada: 1-800-387-9333.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC
3, the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data
may be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless
you delete them and are generally accessible
only in your vehicle when the cellular phone
or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.
You can find more information about the
Master Reset in General Settings. See
Settings (page 434). System data cannot be
accessed without special equipment and
access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. The
Lincoln Motor Company does not access the
system data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of The Lincoln Motor
Company.
383
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HOME SCREEN
E205446
384
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, 911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current route in real time.
*
NavigationC
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information.
*
If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays to
access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio and
climate controls. By using voice commands,
you can keep your hands on the wheel and
your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice button
on the steering wheel and wait for
the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context and
the description of the command tell you what
to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
385
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For
example, you could say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of
choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages
of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen.Help
Included here are some of the most popular
commands for each SYNC 3 feature.
386
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16".
You can also just say the name of a Sirius station such as "The Pulse".
*Sirius Channel ___
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "88.7 FM" or
"1580 AM".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “88.7 FM HD 1”.*FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-connected device.Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device.USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre
to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
387
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to
browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
* This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 59.0°F (15°C)-86.0°F (30°C).Climate Set Temperature ___
Climate Help
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth-enabled phone to the system.
388
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 434).Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny".Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call
Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
389
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If the full number was not entered with the first command, you can continue saying the number.<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you would like to hear.Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
390
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following commands
to set a destination or find a point of interest.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or an address.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality.Find an Address
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find Intersection
State the name of the POI category you would like to search for nearby such as "Destination nearest
restaurants".
Destination Nearest ___
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Destination Previous Destination
Allows you to route to your home address.Destination Home
391
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3.Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.Find New Apps
392
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the mobile app on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app if the app is running on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app, followed
by help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be
available in all markets. Activation and a
subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Forecast
Help
393
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Phone Confirmation On
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Phone Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
394
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
395
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
ENTERTAINMENT
E205443
396
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
Message and descriptionMessage
C Presets
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
*SIRIUS
*CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.Apps
* This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
397
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on the
radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen,
select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only enter
a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's call
numbers, you can select:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit without
changing the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station and
then press and hold one of the memory
preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while
the system saves the station and then
returns.
There are two preset banks available for AM
and three banks for FM. To access additional
presets, tap the preset button. The indicator
on the preset button shows which bank of
presets you are currently viewing.
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term that begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
398
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SIRIUS
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for Sirius:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station.Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
399
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as
you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different
preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you
to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on
any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 434).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press
and hold one of the memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SIRIUS. To access additional presets, tap the
preset button. The indicator on the preset
button shows which bank of presets you are
currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 434).
400
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a
weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interference
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This message should disap-
pear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce
audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
401
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this channel.Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring signal…
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check channel guide.
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your
vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 434).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
402
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for
stations that have more than 1 HD multicast
(For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and
Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this
button allows you cycle through all of the
HD stations on that specific frequency. For
example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1,
HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly
causes the radio to cycle through the HD
stations in a cyclic increasing order.
403
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes
before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital
broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the
station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or
digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
404
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio broad-
caster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio
volume.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the
audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast
channel when recalling a preset or
from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form. *Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form. *Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
405
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company
and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed, added
or deleted at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
* You can find the form here:
Website
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat.Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number
one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
406
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not
highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number
one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently
playing track, press the cover art or Info
button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide
30-second skip buttons when you listen to
audio books or podcasts. These buttons
allow you to skip forward or backward within
a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.Browse
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all
tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
New Search
Play All
407
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the
category you are browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your
USB device.
Explore Device
408
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the instrument
panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB media
devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb
drives, and charge devices if they support
this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain audio
apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or
bluetooth-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 431).
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, iPhone,
and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000
songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the touchscreen
to access your climate control features.
Depending on your vehicle line and option
package, your climate screen may look
different from one of the screens shown
below. Your screen may not contain all of
the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 434).
409
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E206820
Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.A
Heated steering wheel:B
410
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F in
temperatures as low as -4°F. The wheel maintains an approximate temperature of 90°F and operates independently from the heated
seats and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in between the leather covering and foam core to help provide
maximum heat without adversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel.
Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting the vehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated
steering wheel may also turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched your vehicle off.
Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat the wheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.
Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.C
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through the windshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the
highest speed and the driver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 136).
AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The
system adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the
vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.
D
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.
E
DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switch the off and link the passenger temperature to the
driver temperature, touch the DUAL button.
F
Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automatically turn on when you or your passenger adjust the
passenger temperature.
411
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.G
Fan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air that circulates in your vehicle.H
Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAX A/C.
A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.I
MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver and passenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated
air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest
speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even when you
switch the air conditioning A/C button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. When recirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed
to cool down the interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching the interior.
Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may preventit from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C
to reduce risk of fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes during hot weather in order
to improve cooling efficiency.
Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually, together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area
you desire.
J
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
412
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
PHONE
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of the system. Once you pair your cell phone,
you can access many options using the
touchscreen or voice commands. While the
system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
413
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
Websites
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available when a phone
is paired and connected.
414
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
E205447
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call ListA
415
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.ContactsB
Selecting this button allows you to choose a
specific letter to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options.Phone SettingsC
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts. See Settings (page 434).
Displays all recent text messages.Text MessagesD
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone KeypadE
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a call.Call
Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail. New text message notifications are not
displayed on the screen and all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not DisturbF
Users with phones having voice services may
see a button to access the feature. For
example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A
press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
416
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the number
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an entry
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in your
phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and
number display on the screen along with the
call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
• 911 Assist (United States and Canada
Only). See Settings (page 434).
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
418
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the button
on the steering
wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
Item
Mute You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Privacy
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by
your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm
to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
419
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
The system allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disables
some system features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer
with iOS 7.1 or newer. We recommend
updating to the latest iOS version.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port.
2. Select Apple CarPlay on the touchscreen.
To disable Apple CarPlay on your phone,
go to the settings on the touchscreen and
select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Select the name of your device and then
select:
Disable
To return to the system, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to your
device from Google Play.
2. Plug your phone into a USB port.
3. Select Android Auto on the touchscreen.
To disable Android Auto on your phone, go
to settings on the touchscreen and select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Select the name of your device and then
select:
Disable
To return to the system, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto menu
bar at the bottom of the touchscreen, and
then touch the option to return to SYNC.
NAVIGATION
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
420
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D city
maps show detailed outlines of buildings,
visible land use, landscape features, and
detailed railroad infrastructure for the most
essential cities around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models of
entire city areas including navigable roads,
parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D
landmarks and city models appear in 3D map
mode only. Coverage of these varies and
improves with updated map releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see a
farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset increments.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the
map.
The information bar tells you the names of
streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over
them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on the
right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI) grouping
icon: You can choose up to three
POI icons to display on the map. If
the chosen POIs are located close
together or are at the same location a box is
used to display a single category icon
instead of repeating the same icon, in order
to reduce clutter. When you select the box
on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the pop
up to see a list of the available POIs. You can
scroll through and select POIs from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow
will be indicated on the map by green (clear),
yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road
highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the
information is available and varies across the
US.
421
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different types
of incidents. See Settings (page 434).
You can set a destination by hovering above
a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example,
you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
422
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
One to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destinations
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
These locations cannot be deleted individually. To delete them, preform a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 451).
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
423
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select:Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select:Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Favorites include any location you have previously saved.Favorites
To add Favorites:
Select this button and enter a location into the destination bar.Add a Favorite
Select this option to have the system locate the address you have entered.Search
Select this button when the address you have entered appears on the screen.Save
The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You can now select this address from the
favorites screen.
POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle configuration):Point of Interest (POI)
Categories
424
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Food
Fuel
hotel
ATM
Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected a category, follow the menus to
find what you are looking for.
See All
Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
425
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options.Start
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then
returns you to the map mode screen.
Cancel
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination.Start
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat
route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to
the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your
destination.
426
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to
cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation.Highway Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they
are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations.
You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route.Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A
screen then appears and you can press:
427
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires
an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 434).Navigation Settings
Provides your current location city, longitude and latitude and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen.Cancel Route
Selecting this option switches off the audio navigation guidance. Press the button again to un-mute guidance.Mute Guidance
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information
on how to set waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
428
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can also have
the system set the
order for you by
pressing:
GoTo return to your
route press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route
as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass)
while on an active route. This brings up
the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination has
been selected, the screen allows you to
set the destination as a waypoint by
selecting:
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your
waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the
location. You can select up to five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
429
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1110
cities (1049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address, phone number and a star rating.
Press More Information to see a photo, a
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation
and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate and
subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link information. It helps you locate
the best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see current
sports scores. See Apps (page 431).
The system calculates a reasonable efficient
route based on available speed limits, traffic,
and road conditions. You may know a local
short cut that is more efficient at a given time
than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you
should expect a slight difference in minutes
or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States
and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
You can also visit:
430
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model of
your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to HERE
by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
HERE evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink
enabled smartphone apps. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control
main features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
Websites
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded. Some
apps will work automatically with no setup.
Other apps will want you to configure your
personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the App needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
431
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Connect Mobile
Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Ford in
the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage statistics
and debugging information. Updates may
take place automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each
connected device the first time you select a
mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is not
responsible for any additional charges you
may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 434).
App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change a
permission group status any time when not
driving, by using the settings menu. While in
the settings menu, you can also see the data
included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle information,
Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed,
and/or Push notifications. You can enable all
groups or none of them during the initial app
permissions prompts. The settings menu
offers individual group permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions, apps
will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3
unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings
menu.
432
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current
traffic alerts, view the current weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see scores
to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.Movie Listings
433
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the
chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and adjust
the settings for many of the system features.
To access additional settings, swipe the
screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the
following:
434
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off.Speed Adaptive Volume
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media device
such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is
the active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following options
for active devices only.
435
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing,
you can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is
playing, you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’ s music files. If no cover art for the files
exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files.
This overrides any cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Reset Media
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Database Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device.Device Information
436
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows
on the right adjust the minute. You can then
select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone Update
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to GPS Time
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access the
following:
ActionMenu Item
OnBluetooth
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device
is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing
a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a
device and the available options.
437
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
438
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in the previous table.Add a Bluetooth Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options:
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected
device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to see phone and device information.Device Information
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to
date.
Automatic Contact Download
On/Off
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose:Sort By:
439
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact
list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive a call. This option may not be available
for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ringtone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
440
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert (Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message.Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when
the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call.Roaming Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low.Low Battery Notification
911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile phone’ s
contacts have been downloaded, you can
adjust the following option:
441
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick
access at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
Set Emergency Contacts
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source such
as AM or FM is the active media source.
Pressing the button allows you to access the
following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on current
radio source, If Available)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system
display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets (AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the
currently tuned source.
442
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots.Breadcrumbs
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed
by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map.Incident Map Icons
443
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred
route setting.
Always Use ___ Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance.Use HOV Lanes
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination.Automatically Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Eco Time Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based
on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible.
Dynamic Route Guidance
444
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance Prompts
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data plan
associated with the connected device.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage statistics
and debugging information. Updates may
take place automatically.
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
445
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on
SYNC 3.
OnMobile Apps
Off
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu
disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app updates.Update Mobile Apps
There are three possible statuses:
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive an update.No update is required.The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Select this button if an update is required and
you want to request this update manually. For
example, when your mobile device is connected
to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select:
Request Update
446
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing
the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also be SYNC 3
enabled apps listed under
these options.
Note: Ford and Lincoln are not responsible
or liable for any damages or loss of privacy
relating to usage of an app, or dissemination
of any vehicle data that you approve Ford
and Lincoln to provide to an app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touch-
screen.
Touch Screen Beep
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have
an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection.
Automatic System Updates
447
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Information pertaining to the system and its software.About
Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal
data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi
You can adjust the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates.Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.View Available Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may
require a security code to connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such
as the signal strength, connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already
connected.
Wi-Fi Available Notifications
448
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color all
the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: You vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a personal
door keypad code. To add or erase a
personal code, you first need to enter the
five-digit factory set code. You can find this
code on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box or from your authorized dealer.
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner manual.
449
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your system.
You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside
light level.
Auto
The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing.Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier.Night
The screen goes black and does not display anything. To switch the screen back on,
simply tap the screen.
Off
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions.Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings by
selecting the following options.
450
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations.Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts name with you before
making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands
when the voice button is pressed.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit code
must be entered to enable and disable valet
mode. You can use any PIN you chose but
you must use the same PIN to disable valet
mode. The system asks you to input the
code.
Note: If the system is locked and you cannot
remember the PIN, please contact the
Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility, visit
the Ford or Lincoln website.
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
451
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings on your cell
phone may be affecting SYNC 3
performance.
There is background noise
during a phone call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for
the microphone icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the
door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that
your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to be restarted.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not able to
download my phonebook.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
452
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Limitations on your cell phone's capab-
ility.
The system says "Phone-
book downloaded" but my
SYNC 3 phonebook is
empty or is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to
your cell phone's memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my cell phone
to SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your
device, then trying again.
Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative
to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
453
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with the your
vehicle make and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system
to activate this settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if
the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone.
454
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not
supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through
Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Audible text messages do
not work on my cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual
for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider
and software version.
This is a cell phone limitation.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your
vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or
active security settings.
455
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize my device when I start
my vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have
started the media player on your device.
This is a device-dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
The device is not connected.
Make sure that all song details are populated.
Your music files may not contain the
correct artist, song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize music that is on my
device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass
storage to media transfer protocol class.
The song may have copyright protection
that does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 396).The file format is not supported by SYNC
3.
Perform a master reset. See Settings (page 434).The device needs to be re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
456
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect my device,
I sometimes do not hear
any sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB, select AirPlay from the devices
Control Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay
from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connection.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a unique
identifier, such as part of the MAC address.
Multiple Access points within range with the
same SSID.
457
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Position the vehicle close to the hotspot with
the front of the vehicle facing the hotspot
direction and remove obstacles if possible.
Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cord-
less phones may cause interference.
Weak signal probably due to distance from
the hotspot, obstruction or high interference.
Disconnecting after successful connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated wind-
shield, try positioning the vehicle so that the
windshield is not facing the hotspot. If you
have metallic window tinting but not on the
windshield, position the vehicle to face the
hotspot. If all windows are tinted, you can
open the windows in the direction of the
hotspot if that is feasible.
There may be an obstruction between SYNC
3 and the hotspot.
Poor signal seen by Sync despite being near
a hotspot.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.
Please set the network to visible and try again.The hotspot was defined as a hidden network.A hotspot is not listed in the list of available
networks.
458
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not provide a hotspot.SYNC 3 does not provide a hotspot.SYNC 3 is not seen when searching for Wi-Fi
networks from your phone or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent,
test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.
Poor signal strength, too far from the hotspot,
hotspot is supporting multiple connections,
slow Internet connection or other problems.
Software download takes too long.
Test the connection with another device, if the
hotspot requires a subscription, you may
contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is no new software.
The connected hotspot may be a managed
one and it requires either a subscription or
agreeing to the terms and conditions.
SYNC 3 seems to connect with a hotspot and
the signal strength is excellent but the soft-
ware is not being updated.
459
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smartphone;
an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or an iPhone
3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, make sure you pair and connect your
phone to SYNC 3 in order to find AppLink-
capable apps on your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB port with an Apple
USB cable.
You did not connect an Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile Applications: When I select
"Connect Mobile Apps," SYNC 3 does not find
any applications.
Make sure you have downloaded and installed
the latest version of the app from your phone's
app store. Make sure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps require you to register
or login to the app on the phone before using
them with AppLink. Also, some may have a
"Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed and
running on your mobile device.
My phone is connected, but I still cannot find
any apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover it
inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select
it and restart the app. If the app does not have
that option, select the phone's settings menu
Sometimes apps do not properly close and
re-open their connection to SYNC 3, over
ignition cycles, for example.
My phone is connected, my app(s) are running,
but I still cannot find any apps.
460
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
and select 'Apps', then find the particular app
and choose 'Force stop'. Do not forget to
restart the app afterward, then select "Connect
Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then swipe
up on the app to close it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app again to restart it.
After a few seconds, the app should then
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu.
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on
your phone. If you are in your vehicle, SYNC
3 should be able to automatically re-connect
to your phone if you press the "Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue on some older
versions of the Android operating system that
may cause apps that were found on your
previous vehicle drive to not be found again
if you did not switch Bluetooth off.
My Android phone is connected, my app(s)
are running, I restarted them, but I still cannot
find any apps.
461
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a
moment, and plug the USB cable back in to
the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu.
If not, "Force Close" the application and restart
it.
You may need to reset the USB connection
to SYNC 3.
My iPhone is connected, my app is running, I
restarted the app but I still cannot find it on
SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device
by using the device's volume control buttons
which are most often found on the side of the
device.
The Bluetooth volume on the phone may be
low.
I have an Android phone. I found and started
my media app on SYNC 3, but there is no
sound or the sound is very low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have a limited number
of Bluetooth ports that apps can use to
connect. If you have more AppLink apps on
your phone than the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will not see all of your
apps listed in the SYNC 3 mobile apps menu.
I can only see some of the AppLink apps
running on my phone listed in the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps Menu.
462
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice
commands at the beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand what I am saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list
of voice commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command.You may be speaking too soon or at the
wrong time.
Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media
section.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand the name of a song
or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device.
For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix
featuring Jennifer Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you
have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name may have some
special characters that are not being
recognized by SYNC 3.
463
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure that you are saying the name exactly as it appears on your
phone. For example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson", say "Call Joe
Wilson". If your contact name is "Mom", say "Call Mom".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand or is calling the
wrong contact when I want
to make a call.
Make sure that your contact names do not have any special characters
like *, - or +.
The contact name may contain special
characters.
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the contact names stored on your cell phone.
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your phonebook.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign names
stored on my cell phone.
Helpful Hint: You can select your contact manually. Press PHONE.
Select the option for phonebook and then contact name. Press the
soft-key option to hear it. SYNC 3 will read the contact name to you,
giving you some idea of the pronunciation it is expecting.
464
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names
(for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunci-
ation for these artists.
You may be saying the foreign names
using the currently selected language for
SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign tracks,
artists, albums, genres and
playlist names from my
media player or USB flash
drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded
human voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompt
technology.
The system generates
voice prompts and the
pronunciation of some
words may not be accurate
for my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
465
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text
display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most
popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available,
SYNC 3 remains in the current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support the currently
selected language for the instrument
cluster and information and entertainment
display.
The language selected for
the instrument cluster and
information and entertain-
ment display does not
match the SYNC 3
language (phone, USB,
Bluetooth audio, voice
control and voice prompts).
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore
functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text
messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume
using the SYNC 3 system.
466
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting please call or visit the
Lincoln Website.
Lincoln Support
United States: 1-800-521-4140Customer Relationship Center
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
owner.lincoln.comWebsite
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
467
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit our
online store at:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Accessories are available for your
vehicle through an authorized Lincoln dealer.
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
accessory through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Side-window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior style
• All-weather floor mats.
• Premium carpeted floor mats.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup (smoker's packages).
• Camping tent*.
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo net.
• Cargo organizer.
• Luggage cover.
• Recovery hook (towing eye).
• Roof racks and carriers*.
• Tablet cradle*.
• Trailer hitch.
• Trailer hitch accessories.
Peace of mind
• Car cover*.
• Remote start.
• Roadside assistance kit*.
• Vehicle security.
• Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
468
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories, equipment, passengers and
luggage to your vehicle:
• Do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Consult an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of radio
transmitter-equipped mobile
communications systems, for example,
two-way radios, telephones and theft
alarms. Any such equipment should
comply with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations, and an authorized dealer
should install this equipment.
• An authorized dealer should install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particular if
their manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized dealer add any
non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
469
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH
LINCOLN PROTECT.
Lincoln Protect (U.S. Only)
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It’s the
extended service plan backed by the Lincoln
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage.
Lincoln Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Extended
Service Plan. With Lincoln Protect you
minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills
and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four core Lincoln Protect plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it’ s
probably easier to list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plans are honored
by all authorized Lincoln dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the
day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect plan coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new
owner. Which should give you and your
potential buyer a little more peace of mind.
470
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lincoln Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
Lincoln Protect also offers a Premium
Maintenance Plan that covers all scheduled
maintenance, and selected wear items. The
coverage is prepaid, so you never have to
worry about the cost of your vehicle’s
maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect has to
offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit check or
hassles. To learn more, call our Lincoln
Protect Extended Service Plan specialists at
800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA
ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Lincoln
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
471
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Lincoln Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 344).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
472
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 291).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
473
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
474
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
475
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
476
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(5000-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
477
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 290).
478
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
479
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
Change the PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD). See Special Operating Conditions Scheduled Maintenance (page
480).
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
480
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the message appearing
in the information display, prompting you to
change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers). Perform
the 30000-mile (48000-kilometer)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles
(48000 kilometers) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at
25000 miles [40000 kilometers]).
Perform the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD).Inspect frequently, service
as required
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change the PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD). See Axle and PTU Maintenance items under Exceptions later in
this section.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
481
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.
*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change the PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD). See Axle and PTU Maintenance items under Exceptions later in
this section.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*
This is an optional feature.
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.
*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
482
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change the PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD). See Axle and PTU Maintenance items under Exceptions later in
this section.
*
This is an optional feature.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 290).
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle and PTU Maintenance
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle
(AWD only) in your vehicle does not require
any normal scheduled maintenance unless
the vehicle has experienced extended
periods of extreme/severe duty cycle driving
or the PTU and/or the rear axle has been
submerged in water. Checking the PTU and
rear axle fluid is not necessary unless the
unit shows signs of leakage. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
483
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3000 miles
(5000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is 1800
miles (3000 kilometers).
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
484
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
485
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
486
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
487
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
488
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
489
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
490
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
491
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
492
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
493
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
494
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
495
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
496
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
497
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
498
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
499
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
500
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
501
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
502
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
503
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
504
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
505
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
506
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
507
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
508
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
509
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
510
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
511
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
512
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim. Arbitration
fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
513
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’ s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or http://www.telenav.com from
time to time to review the then current
version of this Agreement and of the privacy
policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
514
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
515
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
516
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
517
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
518
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
519
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
520
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
521
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
522
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
523
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Appendices
524
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................133
About This Manual............................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................184
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................184
Accessories...................................................468
Exterior style........................................................468
Interior style.........................................................468
Lifestyle.................................................................468
Peace of mind.....................................................468
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............209
Active Park Assist - Vehicles With: Active
Park Assist....................................................196
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature.............................................................202
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking, Park
Out Assist..........................................................196
Troubleshooting the System...........................202
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................299
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................300
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................299
Adjusting the Steering Wheel......................78
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column................................................................78
Airbag Disposal................................................51
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................133
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter..............303
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................76
All-Wheel Drive..............................................179
Ambient Lighting............................................92
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................76
Arming the Alarm..................................................76
Disarming the Alarm.............................................76
Appendices...................................................504
Apps..................................................................431
..................................................................................431
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link......................433
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............107
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................107
Keyless Warning Alert........................................107
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................107
Audio Control...................................................79
Seek, Next or Previous........................................79
Audio System................................................362
General Information...........................................362
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD...........................................................363
Auto Hold........................................................187
Using Auto Hold..................................................189
Autolamps.........................................................87
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........88
Automatic Climate Control..........................133
Automatic High Beam Control....................90
Activating the System..........................................90
Manually Overriding the System.......................91
Automatic Transmission...............................173
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning.............................................................178
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.........................176
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................178
Push Button Shift Transmission........................173
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission.............175
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................295
Auto-Start-Stop...............................................161
Disabling Auto StartStop...................................162
Enabling Auto StartStop.....................................161
Autowipers.......................................................83
Auxiliary Power Points.................................153
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................153
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................153
Locations...............................................................153
525
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................179
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery......................296
Blind Spot Information System.................223
Switching the System Off and On..................225
System Errors......................................................225
Using the System...............................................223
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............286
Booster Seats..................................................25
Types of Booster Seats.......................................26
Brake Fluid Check.......................................295
Brakes..............................................................184
General Information............................................184
Breaking-In.....................................................249
Bulb Specification Chart..............................301
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................137
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................350
Specifications.......................................................351
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™....................................................356
Specifications......................................................357
Capacities and Specifications...................344
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................306
Center Console.............................................155
Changing a Bulb...........................................300
Front Direction Indicator...................................301
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp.............300
LED Lamps............................................................301
License Plate Lamp.............................................301
Changing a Fuse..........................................283
Fuses.....................................................................283
Changing a Road Wheel.............................336
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................337
Tire Change Procedure....................................338
Changing the 12V Battery..........................296
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................303
Changing the Wiper Blades......................298
Front Wiper Blades............................................298
Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................299
Checking MyKey System Status.................60
MyKey Distance....................................................60
Number of Admin Keys........................................61
Number of MyKeys...............................................60
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................298
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................38
Child Restraint Positioning...........................28
Child Safety.......................................................17
General Information...............................................17
Child Safety Locks..........................................29
Left-Hand Side.......................................................30
Right-Hand Side....................................................30
Cleaning Leather Seats................................311
Cleaning Products.......................................305
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................312
Cleaning the Engine....................................307
Cleaning the Exterior..................................306
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................306
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................307
Stripes or Graphics.............................................307
Underbody...........................................................307
Under Hood.........................................................307
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens............................310
Cleaning the Interior....................................308
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior..............................................................309
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................308
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................60
Climate............................................................409
Climate Control..............................................133
526
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Climate Controlled Seats............................146
Cooled Seats........................................................147
Collision Warning System..........................230
Principle Of Operation......................................230
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.............................291
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........49
Creating a MyKey...........................................59
Programming or Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................60
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................225
False Alerts..........................................................229
Switching the System Off and On..................229
System Errors......................................................229
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................228
System Limitations.............................................228
Using the System...............................................225
Cruise Control.................................................80
Principle of Operation.......................................208
Type 1.......................................................................80
Type 2......................................................................80
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................208
Customer Assistance..................................259
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...............................89
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)..........................................89
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................89
Direction Indicators.........................................91
Drive Control.................................................233
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL............................233
Driver Alert......................................................217
Using Driver Alert................................................217
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................42
Children and Airbags...........................................43
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................43
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................48
Driving Aids.....................................................217
Driving Hints..................................................249
Driving Through Water...............................250
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................89
E
Economical Driving......................................249
Electric Parking Brake..................................185
Applying the electric parking brake...............185
Applying the electric parking brake when the
vehicle is moving............................................186
Battery With No Charge.....................................187
Releasing the electric parking brake.............186
Emission Control System.............................170
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).........................171
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing................................................................172
End User License Agreement...................504
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) ....................................504
Engine Block Heater....................................160
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................160
Engine Coolant Check.................................291
Adding Engine Coolant....................................293
Checking the Engine Coolant..........................291
Recycled Engine Coolant.................................293
Severe Climates.................................................293
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................294
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................75
Engine Oil Check.........................................290
Adding Engine Oil..............................................290
Engine Oil Dipstick......................................290
527
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™....................................................344
Drivebelt Routing................................................344
Engine Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™....................................................345
Drivebelt Routing................................................345
Entertainment................................................396
AM/FM Radio.......................................................398
Apps.......................................................................409
Bluetooth Stereo or USB..................................407
CD (If equipped).................................................406
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)..............402
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated).............398
Sources.................................................................397
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information...................................409
USB Ports.............................................................409
Environment......................................................16
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................185
Essential Towing Checks............................245
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................246
Hitches..................................................................245
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................246
Safety Chains......................................................245
Trailer Brakes.......................................................245
Trailer Lamps.......................................................245
When Towing a Trailer.......................................246
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................14
Exterior Mirrors................................................94
Auto-Dimming Feature........................................96
Auto-Folding Mirrors............................................95
Blind Spot Monitor................................................97
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................95
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................96
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors............................96
Lincoln Welcome Mat..........................................96
Memory Mirrors.....................................................96
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................94
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................32
How to Extract Seatbelts in the Rear Outboard
Positions.............................................................35
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................33
Using a Sliding Clip..............................................33
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy..................33
Floor Mats......................................................250
Front Parking Aid..........................................195
Front Passenger Sensing System..............44
Fuel and Refueling........................................164
Fuel Consumption.........................................169
Calculating Fuel Economy................................169
Filling the Tank.....................................................169
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................166
Fuel Filter.......................................................296
Fuel Quality.....................................................165
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................165
Fuel Shutoff...................................................253
Fuses...............................................................267
Fuse Specification Chart............................267
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box...............274
Power Distribution Box.....................................267
Pre-Fuse Box.......................................................267
Rear Cargo Fuse Box.........................................279
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............148
Gauges..............................................................101
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............103
Fuel Gauge...........................................................102
Information Display.............................................102
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................52
Intelligent Access.................................................52
General Maintenance Information...........472
Multi-Point Inspection........................................475
528
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Owner Checks and Services...........................474
Protecting Your Investment..............................472
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.............................472
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................472
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................263
Getting the Services You Need................259
Away From Home..............................................259
Global Opening and Closing.......................94
Closing the Windows...........................................94
Opening the Windows.........................................94
H
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................253
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.......................299
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................89
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp............................300
Head Restraints.............................................138
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................140
Heated Seats..................................................145
Front Seats............................................................145
Rear Seats.............................................................146
Heated Steering Wheel..................................81
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................136
Heated Exterior Mirrors.....................................136
Heated Rear Window.........................................136
Heated Wiper Park..............................................136
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................133
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................135
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................136
General Hints........................................................135
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................135
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............136
Recommended Settings for Heating..............135
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................136
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................184
Home Screen................................................384
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............286
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................260
Information Display Control.........................80
Information Displays.....................................108
General Information............................................108
Information Messages...................................114
Active Park.............................................................114
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................115
AdvanceTrac™........................................................116
Airbag......................................................................116
Alarm.......................................................................116
All-Wheel Drive......................................................117
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................117
Auto Start-Stop......................................................118
Battery and Charging System...........................119
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System...............................................................120
Collision Warning System.................................120
Doors and Locks...................................................121
Driver Alert.............................................................121
Fuel.........................................................................122
Hill Start Assist.....................................................122
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................122
Lane Keeping System........................................123
Maintenance.........................................................124
MyKey.....................................................................125
Park Aid..................................................................126
Park Brake.............................................................126
Power Steering.....................................................127
Remote Start.........................................................128
Seats.......................................................................128
Starting System ...................................................128
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................129
529
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Traction Control...................................................129
Trailer......................................................................130
Transmission.........................................................130
Installing Child Restraints..............................19
Child Seats..............................................................19
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts............................19
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................22
Using Tether Straps..............................................24
Instrument Cluster.........................................101
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................88
Interior Lamps..................................................92
Front Interior Lamp...............................................92
Rear Interior Lamp................................................92
Interior Mirror...................................................97
Auto-Dimming Mirror............................................97
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................254
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................255
Jump Starting......................................................256
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................254
Removing the Jumper Cables........................256
K
Keyless Entry.....................................................71
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD................................................................71
Keyless Starting.............................................156
Ignition Modes.....................................................156
Keys and Remote Controls..........................52
L
Lane Keeping System..................................218
Switching the System On and Off...................218
Lighting Control..............................................86
Headlamp Flasher.................................................87
High Beams............................................................87
Lighting..............................................................86
General Information.............................................86
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......12
Lincoln Protect..............................................470
EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA
ONLY).................................................................471
Lincoln Protect (U.S. Only)................................470
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers...............235
Load Carrying................................................235
Load Limit.......................................................236
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................240
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................236
Locking and Unlocking.................................63
Activating Intelligent Access.............................65
Autolock Feature..................................................66
Autounlock Feature.............................................66
Battery Saver..........................................................67
Illuminated Entry....................................................67
Illuminated Exit......................................................67
Mechanical Key.....................................................64
Opening a Rear Door from Inside....................65
Power Door Locks................................................63
Remote Control.....................................................63
Smart Unlocks.......................................................66
Welcome Lighting.................................................67
Locks..................................................................63
Luggage Covers...........................................235
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................336
M
Maintenance..................................................286
General Information...........................................286
530
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Media Hub......................................................365
Memory Function..........................................143
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................144
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key...............144
Saving a PreSet Position...................................143
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................108
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................136
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................93
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Moonroof..........................................................98
Bounce-Back..........................................................99
Opening and Closing the Moonroof................99
Power Sunscreen.................................................99
Venting the Moonroof.........................................99
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™...........346
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™............347
MyKey Troubleshooting.................................61
MyKey™..............................................................58
Principle of Operation.........................................58
N
Navigation......................................................420
cityseeker.............................................................430
Destination Mode...............................................422
Map Mode.............................................................421
Navigation Map Updates..................................430
Navigation Menu.................................................427
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link......................430
Waypoints.............................................................429
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............476
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™..............................476
Maintenance Intervals.......................................478
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................291
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................290
Opening and Closing the Hood...............286
Opening the Hood.............................................286
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................264
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............264
Overhead Console.......................................155
P
Parking Aids....................................................194
Principle of Operation........................................194
Passive Anti-Theft System............................75
SecuriLock®............................................................75
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................75
Perchlorate........................................................12
Personal Safety System™..............................40
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................40
Phone...............................................................413
During a Phone Call............................................418
Making Calls..........................................................417
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................413
Phone Menu..........................................................414
Receiving Calls.....................................................418
Smartphone Connectivity................................420
Text Messaging....................................................419
Post-Crash Alert System............................256
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................63
Power Liftgate.................................................68
Hands-Free Feature..............................................71
Obstacle Detection................................................71
Opening and Closing the Liftgate....................69
Setting the Liftgate Open Height......................70
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................70
Power Seats.....................................................141
Power Lumbar......................................................143
Power Windows..............................................93
Accessory Delay...................................................94
531
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Bounce-Back..........................................................93
One-Touch Down..................................................93
One-Touch Up.......................................................93
Window Lock..........................................................94
Protecting the Environment..........................16
R
Rear Parking Aid............................................195
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................147
Rear Seats.......................................................144
Folding the Seatback.........................................145
Recline Adjustment.............................................145
Unfolding the Seatback.....................................145
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................235
Cargo Management System............................235
Rear View Camera.......................................204
Using the Rear View Camera System...........204
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................204
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............84
Rear Window Washer..........................................85
Rear Window Wiper..............................................84
Recommended Towing Weights..............242
Refueling..........................................................167
Remote Control...............................................53
Car Finder...............................................................55
Intelligent Access Key.........................................53
Remote Start..........................................................55
Replacing the Battery..........................................53
Sounding the Panic Alarm..................................55
Remote Start...................................................137
Automatic Settings..............................................137
Removing a Headlamp...............................300
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...................311
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs.....................................................13
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................57
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................265
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......265
Roadside Assistance...................................252
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................253
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance
Program Coverage........................................253
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................253
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................252
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................252
Roadside Emergencies...............................252
Roof Racks and Load Carriers..................235
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................249
Running Out of Fuel.....................................166
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................166
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................166
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................48
Safety Precautions........................................164
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............484
Scheduled Maintenance.............................472
Seatbelt Extension.........................................39
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................35
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................36
Belt-Minder™...........................................................36
Seatbelts............................................................31
Principle of Operation...........................................31
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................35
Conditions of operation......................................36
Seats.................................................................138
Security..............................................................75
Settings...........................................................434
911 Assist................................................................441
532
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Ambient Lighting................................................449
Bluetooth..............................................................437
Clock......................................................................437
Display..................................................................450
General..................................................................447
Media Player........................................................435
Mobile Apps.........................................................445
Navigation............................................................443
Phone....................................................................438
Radio......................................................................442
Sound....................................................................434
Valet Mode............................................................451
Vehicle...................................................................449
Voice Control.......................................................450
Wi-Fi.......................................................................448
Side Airbags.....................................................47
Sitting in the Correct Position....................138
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................331
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and Utility
Type Vehicles.....................................................14
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance...............14
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow...............14
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................480
Exceptions............................................................483
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................208
Stability Control.............................................192
Principle of Operation........................................192
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................157
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................158
Failure to Start......................................................158
Fast Restart...........................................................157
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................159
Important Ventilating Information...................159
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................159
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................159
Starting and Stopping the Engine.............156
General Information............................................156
Steering..........................................................229
Electric Power Steering....................................229
Steering Wheel................................................78
Storage Compartments...............................155
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................98
Sun Visors.........................................................98
Illuminated Vanity Mirror.....................................98
Supplementary Restraints System..............41
Principle of Operation...........................................41
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
SYNC™ 3..........................................................366
General Information...........................................366
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting...........................451
T
Tailgate
See: Power Liftgate..............................................68
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............344
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)...........................261
Ticket Holders................................................155
Tire Care..........................................................317
Glossary of Tire Terminology...........................318
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................317
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................319
Temperature A B C..............................................318
Traction AA A B C................................................318
Treadwear.............................................................318
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............332
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.........................................333
533
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................333
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................315
Towing a Trailer..............................................241
Load Placement...................................................241
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........247
Emergency Towing.............................................247
Recreational Towing..........................................247
Towing..............................................................241
Traction Control.............................................190
Principle of Operation........................................190
Trailer Sway Control....................................242
Transmission Code Designation..............349
Transmission...................................................173
Transmission
See: Transmission................................................173
Transporting the Vehicle............................257
U
Under Hood Overview................................288
Unique Driving Characteristics...................161
Universal Garage Door Opener................148
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............148
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................209
Automatic Cancellation......................................213
Blocked Sensor...................................................215
Canceling the Set Speed..................................212
Changing the Set Speed...................................213
Detection Issues..................................................214
Following a Vehicle............................................210
Hilly Condition Usage........................................213
Overriding the Set Speed.................................212
Resuming the Set Speed...................................213
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed................210
Setting the Gap Distance...................................211
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off..........213
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On..........210
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...............216
System Not Available.........................................215
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................179
Driving in Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive...................................................................179
Using Cruise Control...................................208
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................209
Switching Cruise Control On...........................208
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems...........................................................61
Using Snow Chains.......................................331
Using Stability Control.................................193
Using Traction Control.................................190
Switching the System Off..................................190
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........190
Using a Switch.....................................................190
Using the Information Display Controls........190
Using Voice Recognition............................385
Audio Voice Commands...................................387
Climate Voice Commands................................388
Mobile App Voice Commands........................392
Navigation Voice Commands...........................391
Phone Voice Commands..................................388
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands......................................................393
Voice Settings Commands...............................394
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................262
V
Vehicle Care..................................................305
General Information...........................................305
Vehicle Certification Label.........................348
Vehicle Identification Number..................348
Vehicle Storage.............................................312
Battery....................................................................313
Body........................................................................312
Brakes.....................................................................313
Cooling system....................................................313
Engine.....................................................................313
Fuel system...........................................................313
General..................................................................312
Miscellaneous.......................................................313
Removing Vehicle From Storage.....................313
534
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
Tires........................................................................313
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................133
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............348
Voice Control...................................................80
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................103
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................103
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................104
Auto Hold Active.................................................104
Auto Hold Unavailable.......................................104
Auto Start-stop.....................................................104
Battery....................................................................104
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................104
Brake System.......................................................104
Cruise Control......................................................104
Direction Indicator...............................................104
Door Ajar...............................................................105
Electric Park Brake..............................................105
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................105
Engine Oil..............................................................105
Fasten Safety Belt...............................................105
Front Airbag..........................................................105
Heads Up Display...............................................105
High Beam............................................................105
Hood Ajar..............................................................105
Low Fuel Level.....................................................105
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................106
Low Washer Fluid................................................106
Parking Lamps.....................................................106
Powertrain Fault..................................................106
Service Engine Soon..........................................106
Stability Control....................................................107
Stability Control Off.............................................107
Washer Fluid Check....................................296
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................306
See: Wipers and Washers..................................82
Waxing.............................................................307
Welcome Lighting............................................91
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................336
Wheels and Tires...........................................315
General Information............................................315
Technical Specifications...................................342
Windows and Mirrors.....................................93
Windshield Washers.......................................84
Windshield Wipers.........................................82
Intermittent Wipe..................................................82
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................82
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................298
Wipers and Washers......................................82
535
MKC (TME) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 01/2016, First Printing
Index
